Table of Contents
- Notations Used in This Guide
- Introduction to Your Projector
- Setting Up the Projector
- Projector Placement
- Installing the Safety Wire
- Projector Connections
- Attaching and Removing the Cable Cover
- Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
- Using Basic Projector Features
- Turning On the Projector
- Turning Off the Projector
- Setting the Date and Time
- Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus
- Projection Modes
- Setting the Screen Type
- Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift
- Displaying a Test Pattern
- Adjusting the Image Height
- Image Shape
- Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring
- Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom
- Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring
- Selecting an Image Source
- Image Aspect Ratio
- Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)
- Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment
- Adjusting the Image Color
- Adjusting the Image Resolution
- Adjusting the Brightness
- Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons
- Adjusting Projector Features
- Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously
- Projecting a PC Free Presentation
- Projecting in Content Playback Mode
- Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily
- Stopping Video Action Temporarily
- Zooming Images (E-Zoom)
- Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)
- Saving a User's Logo Image
- Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings
- Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features
- Using Multiple Projectors
- Projector Security Features
- Using the Projector on a Network
- Wired Network Projection
- Wireless Network Projection
- Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module
- Installing the Wireless LAN Module
- Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection
- Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
- Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode
- Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Infrastructure Mode
- Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device
- Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer
- Using the Wireless Presentation System to Connect Windows/Mac Computers
- Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
- Secure HTTP
- Screen Sharing
- Monitoring and Controlling the Projector
- Epson Projector Management
- Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
- Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser
- Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
- Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP
- Using ESC/VP21 Commands
- PJLink Support
- Crestron Connected Support
- Operating the Projector Using Web API
- Setting Projector Event Schedules
- Adjusting the Menu Settings
- Using the Projector's Menus
- Using the Displayed Keyboard
- Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
- Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu
- Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu
- Projector Display Settings - Display Menu
- Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu
- Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu
- Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
- Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu
- Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu
- Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu
- Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)
- Maintaining the Projector
- Solving Problems
- Projection Problems
- Projector Indicator Status
- Viewing the Status Display
- Solving Image or Sound Problems
- Solutions When No Image Appears
- Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
- Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears
- Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears
- Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular
- Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static
- Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry
- Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect
- Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the Projected Image
- Solutions to Sound Problems
- Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free
- Solutions When You Cannot Project Images Using the PC Free Feature
- Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
- Solving Network Problems
- Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails
- Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web
- Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received
- Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection
- Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring
- Solutions When You Cannot Use Two Screen Mirroring Sources
- Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen Mirroring Connection
- Solutions When You Cannot Receive Shared Images
- Solutions to Problems in Content Playback Mode
- Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function
- Appendix
- Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
- Screen Size and Projection Distance
- Supported Monitor Display Resolutions
- Projector Specifications
- External Dimensions
- Supported Features for Epson Projector Content Manager
- Supported Features for the Epson Projector Professional Tool
- List of Safety Symbols and Instructions
- Laser Safety Information
- Glossary
- Notices
Epson EB-L735U User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for EB-L735U by Epson which is a product in the Data Projectors category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
User's Guide
Contents 2
Notations Used in This Guide 8
Using the Manual to Search for Information .................................. 9
Searching by Keyword................................................................................................................... 9
Jumping Directly from Bookmarks............................................................................................ 9
Printing Only the Pages You Need............................................................................................ 9
Getting the Latest Version of the Documents............................... 10
Introduction to Your Projector 11
Projector Features............................................................................ 12
Long-life Laser Light Source...................................................................................................... 12
Quick and Easy Setup .................................................................................................................. 12
Easy Wireless Projection ............................................................................................................. 12
Managing over a Network ......................................................................................................... 13
Projecting for Exhibitions........................................................................................................... 13
Projector Parts and Functions ........................................................ 15
Projector Parts - Front/Top ........................................................................................................ 15
Projector Parts - Rear.................................................................................................................... 16
Projector Parts - Base ................................................................................................................... 17
Projector Parts - Interface Ports ............................................................................................... 17
Projector Parts - Control Panel................................................................................................. 18
Projector Parts - Remote Control ............................................................................................ 19
Setting Up the Projector 21
Projector Placement ........................................................................ 22
Notes on Transporting ................................................................................................................ 23
Projector Setup and Installation Options............................................................................. 24
Precautions on Installation .................................................................................................. 24
Projection Distance....................................................................................................................... 26
Installing the Safety Wire................................................................ 27
When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB22............................................................................ 27
When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB30............................................................................ 28
Projector Connections ..................................................................... 30
Connecting to a Computer........................................................................................................ 30
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio.............................................. 30
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio ........................................... 31
Connecting to Video Sources ................................................................................................... 31
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source ............................................................................ 31
Connecting to External USB Devices ..................................................................................... 32
USB Device Projection ........................................................................................................... 32
Connecting to a USB Device ............................................................................................... 32
Disconnecting a USB Device ............................................................................................... 33
Connecting to a Document Camera ...................................................................................... 33
Connecting to a Streaming Media Player ............................................................................ 33
Connecting to an HDBaseT Transmitter .............................................................................. 34
Connecting to External Devices............................................................................................... 34
Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor ..................................................................... 35
Connecting to a VGA Monitor ............................................................................................ 35
Connecting to External Speakers ...................................................................................... 35
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model ....................................................... 36
Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections.................................................... 37
Attaching and Removing the Cable Cover .................................... 38
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.................................... 39
Remote Control Operation ........................................................................................................ 40
Using Basic Projector Features 41
Turning On the Projector ................................................................ 42
Home Screen................................................................................................................................... 43
Turning Off the Projector ................................................................ 44
Setting the Date and Time .............................................................. 45
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus ......................... 47
Contents 3
Projection Modes ............................................................................. 48
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control.......................................... 48
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus ............................................................ 48
Setting the Screen Type .................................................................. 50
Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position...................................................... 50
Changing the Horizontal Position of the Image Using Screen Shift.......................... 51
Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift............................. 53
Displaying a Test Pattern ................................................................ 55
Adjusting the Image Height............................................................ 56
Image Shape..................................................................................... 57
Correcting Image Shape with H/V Keystone ...................................................................... 57
Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner ............................................................... 59
Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction..................................................................... 61
Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction................................................................. 63
Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory ..................................................................... 65
Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring........................................ 66
Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom....................................... 67
Adjusting the Image Position Using Image Shift .............................................................. 67
Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring..................................... 69
Selecting an Image Source.............................................................. 70
Image Aspect Ratio .......................................................................... 72
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio.......................................................................................... 72
Available Image Aspect Ratios ................................................................................................. 72
Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode).......................................... 74
Changing the Color Mode ......................................................................................................... 74
Available Color Modes................................................................................................................. 74
Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment............................ 75
Adjusting the Image Color .............................................................. 76
Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.................................................................. 76
Adjusting the Gamma ................................................................................................................. 77
Adjusting the Image Resolution..................................................... 79
Adjusting the Brightness................................................................. 81
Constant Brightness Usage Hours .......................................................................................... 82
Light Source Operation Time.................................................................................................... 83
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons ....................... 84
Adjusting Projector Features 85
Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously ................................. 86
Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection..................... 88
Split Screen Projection Restrictions........................................................................................ 88
Projecting a PC Free Presentation.................................................. 89
Supported PC Free File Types................................................................................................... 89
Precautions on PC Free Projection ......................................................................................... 90
Starting a PC Free Slide Show .................................................................................................. 90
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation ................................................................................. 92
PC Free Display Options ............................................................................................................. 93
Projecting in Content Playback Mode ........................................... 94
Supported Content Playback Mode File Types.................................................................. 94
Switching to Content Playback Mode................................................................................... 95
Projecting Your Playlists ............................................................................................................. 96
Creating Playlists Using Epson Web Control................................................................. 96
Adding Effects to Your Projected Image.............................................................................. 98
Content Playback Mode Restrictions................................................................................... 100
Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily ........................ 101
Stopping Video Action Temporarily ............................................ 102
Zooming Images (E-Zoom)............................................................ 103
Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)........................... 104
Zooming Into Images................................................................................................................ 104
Zooming Out of Images ........................................................................................................... 104
Saving a User's Logo Image .......................................................... 106
Contents 4
Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings ............. 108
Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features ............................ 109
Adjusting the Color Tone (Color Uniformity)................................................................... 109
Running Light Source Calibration ........................................................................................ 110
Using Multiple Projectors ............................................................. 112
Multiple Projector Adjustment Overview.......................................................................... 112
Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control................................. 113
Setting the Projector ID...................................................................................................... 113
Selecting the Projector You want to Operate............................................................ 114
Tiling Images into One Image................................................................................................ 115
Configuring Tiling ................................................................................................................. 115
Blending the Image Edges ...................................................................................................... 116
Adjusting the Black Level................................................................................................... 118
Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area .............................................................. 120
Matching the Image Colors..................................................................................................... 120
Scaling an Image......................................................................................................................... 121
Projector Security Features .......................................................... 124
Password Security Types.......................................................................................................... 124
Setting a Password ............................................................................................................... 124
Selecting Password Security Types ................................................................................ 125
Entering a Password to Use the Projector................................................................... 126
Locking the Projector's Buttons ............................................................................................ 126
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons.................................................................................. 127
Locking the Remote Control Buttons.................................................................................. 127
Installing a Security Cable ....................................................................................................... 128
Using the Projector on a Network 129
Wired Network Projection............................................................. 130
Connecting to a Wired Network ........................................................................................... 130
Selecting Wired Network Settings........................................................................................ 130
Wireless Network Projection ........................................................ 133
Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module.................................................... 133
Installing the Wireless LAN Module..................................................................................... 133
Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection................................................ 134
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually ............................................................... 135
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows .................................................... 138
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac............................................................... 139
Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode....................................... 139
Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Infrastructure Mode................................ 139
Supported Client and CA Certificates............................................................................ 141
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device ................................................................ 142
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer...................................................... 142
Using the Wireless Presentation System to Connect Windows/Mac
Computers..................................................................................................................................... 143
Setting Up the Wireless Presentation System for the First Time........................ 143
Projecting with the Wireless Presentation System................................................... 144
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen
Mirroring)........................................................................................ 145
Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings .................................................................................... 145
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function............................. 147
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10..................................................... 148
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1 .................................................... 148
Secure HTTP.................................................................................... 150
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus .................................................. 150
Supported Web Server Certificates................................................................................ 151
Screen Sharing ............................................................................... 152
Sharing the Screen ..................................................................................................................... 152
Finishing the Screen Sharing............................................................................................ 153
Receiving Shared Screen Images.......................................................................................... 154
Monitoring and Controlling the Projector 155
Epson Projector Management ...................................................... 156
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser ........ 157
Web Control Options................................................................................................................. 158
Contents 5
Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser................. 166
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts ............................... 168
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages ......................................................................... 168
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP............................................. 169
Using ESC/VP21 Commands ........................................................ 170
ESC/VP21 Command List ......................................................................................................... 170
Cable Layouts ............................................................................................................................... 170
PJLink Support ............................................................................... 171
Crestron Connected Support........................................................ 172
Setting Up Crestron Connected Support........................................................................... 172
Operating the Projector Using Web API...................................... 173
Enabling Web API ....................................................................................................................... 173
Setting Projector Event Schedules............................................... 174
Adjusting the Menu Settings 177
Using the Projector's Menus ......................................................... 178
Using the Displayed Keyboard..................................................... 179
Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard................................................................. 179
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu ......................................... 180
Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu....................................... 183
Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu .................... 185
Projector Display Settings - Display Menu.................................. 187
Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu............................. 189
Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu .......... 192
Event ID Code List....................................................................................................................... 193
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu.............................. 195
Network Menu - Network Settings Menu.......................................................................... 196
Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu............................................................................. 197
Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu ................................................................................. 199
Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu ..................................................................... 200
Network Menu - Projector Control Menu .................................................................... 200
Network Menu - Network Projection Settings........................................................... 201
Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection
Menu ............................................................................................... 203
Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu....................... 205
Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All
Settings Menu ................................................................................ 206
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) ...... 207
Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive ................................................................. 207
Transferring Settings From a Computer ............................................................................ 208
Batch Setup Error Notification ......................................................................................... 209
Maintaining the Projector 210
Projector Maintenance .................................................................. 211
Cleaning the Lens........................................................................... 212
Cleaning the Projector Case.......................................................... 213
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance .................................................. 214
Cleaning the Air Filters and Intake Vents ......................................................................... 214
Replacing the Air Filter ............................................................................................................. 216
Updating the Firmware ................................................................. 218
Updating Firmware Using a USB Storage Device........................................................... 218
Updating Firmware Using a Computer and USB Cable ............................................... 219
Solving Problems 221
Projection Problems ...................................................................... 222
Projector Indicator Status ............................................................. 223
Contents 6
Viewing the Status Display ........................................................... 226
Projector Status Display Messages....................................................................................... 226
Solving Image or Sound Problems............................................... 229
Solutions When No Image Appears..................................................................................... 229
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears............................................................... 229
Displaying From a Windows Laptop.............................................................................. 230
Displaying From a Mac Laptop........................................................................................ 230
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears .................................................... 230
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears................................................................ 230
Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular................................................................ 231
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static..................................................... 231
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry .................................................................. 232
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect ................................. 233
Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the Projected Image .......................... 233
Solutions to Sound Problems................................................................................................. 233
Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free......... 234
Solutions When You Cannot Project Images Using the PC Free Feature.............. 234
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems....... 235
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems...................................................... 235
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control............................................................ 235
Solutions to Password Problems........................................................................................... 236
Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running Low"
Message Appears........................................................................................................................ 236
Solving Network Problems ........................................................... 237
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails ................................................................ 237
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web ................... 237
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received............................................ 237
Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection............... 238
Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring................................. 238
Solutions When You Cannot Use Two Screen Mirroring Sources............................ 238
Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen Mirroring
Connection.................................................................................................................................... 239
Solutions When You Cannot Receive Shared Images................................................... 239
Solutions to Problems in Content Playback Mode ..................... 240
Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function ........................... 241
Appendix 242
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts............................. 243
Screens............................................................................................................................................ 243
Cables .............................................................................................................................................. 243
Mounts............................................................................................................................................ 243
For Wireless Connection .......................................................................................................... 243
External Devices .......................................................................................................................... 243
Replacement Parts...................................................................................................................... 244
Screen Size and Projection Distance............................................ 245
EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U........................... 245
EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U ................................................................................................................... 248
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions ..................................... 250
Projector Specifications ................................................................ 254
Connector Specifications ......................................................................................................... 255
External Dimensions...................................................................... 256
Supported Features for Epson Projector Content Manager...... 257
Supported Features for the Epson Projector Professional Tool 258
List of Safety Symbols and Instructions ...................................... 259
Laser Safety Information............................................................... 261
Laser Warning Labels................................................................................................................. 261
Glossary .......................................................................................... 263
Notices ............................................................................................ 265
FCC Compliance Statement.................................................................................................... 265
Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with
requirements of EU directive.................................................................................................. 266
Restriction of Use........................................................................................................................ 266
Operating System References................................................................................................ 266
Trademarks.................................................................................................................................... 266
Notations Used in This Guide
Safety Symbols
The projector and its manuals use graphical symbols and labels to indicate content that tells you how to use the projector safely.
Read and carefully follow the instructions that are marked with these symbols and labels to avoid injury to persons or damage to property.
Warning
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death.
Caution
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.
General Information Notations
Attention
This label indicates procedures that may result in damage or injury if sufficient care is not taken.
This label indicates additional information that may be useful to know.
[Button name] Indicates the name of the buttons on the remote control or the control panel.
Example: [Esc] button
Menu/Setting name Indicates projector menu and setting names.
Example:
Select the Image menu
sImage >Color Mode
This label indicates links to the related pages.
sThis label indicates the projector's current menu level.
gg Related Links
• "Using the Manual to Search for Information" p.9
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Using the Manual to Search for Information 9
The PDF manual allows you to search for information you are looking for by
keyword, or jump directly to specific sections using the bookmarks. You can
also print only the pages you need. This section explains how to use a PDF
manual that has been opened in Adobe Reader X on your computer.
gg Related Links
• "Searching by Keyword" p.9
• "Jumping Directly from Bookmarks" p.9
• "Printing Only the Pages You Need" p.9
Searching by Keyword
Click Edit >Advanced Search. Enter the keyword (text) for information you
want to find in the search window, and then click Search. Hits are displayed
as a list. Click one of the displayed hits to jump to that page.
Jumping Directly from Bookmarks
Click a title to jump to that page. Click +or >to view the lower level titles in
that section. To return to the previous page, perform the following operation
on your keyboard.
• Windows: Hold down Alt, and then press ←.
• Mac OS: Hold down the command key, and then press ←.
Printing Only the Pages You Need
You can extract and print only the pages you need. Click Print in the File
menu, and then specify the pages you want to print in Pages in Pages to
Print.
• To specify a series of pages, enter a hyphen between the start page and the
end page.
Example: 20-25
• To specify pages that are not in series, divide the pages with commas.
Example: 5, 10, 15
Projector Features 12
This projector comes with these special features. Refer to these sections for
more details.
gg Related Links
• "Long-life Laser Light Source" p.12
• "Quick and Easy Setup" p.12
• "Easy Wireless Projection" p.12
• "Managing over a Network" p.13
• "Projecting for Exhibitions" p.13
Long-life Laser Light Source
A solid-state laser light source provides virtually maintenance-free operation
until light source brightness is reduced.
Quick and Easy Setup
• Direct Power On feature to turn on the projector as soon as you plug it in.
• Auto Power On feature to turn on the projector when the projector detects
an image signal from the port you specified as the Auto Power On source.
• Home screen feature to easily select an input source and useful functions.
gg Related Links
• "Home Screen" p.43
• "Turning On the Projector" p.42
Easy Wireless Projection
• Screen Mirroring to connect your projector and mobile device wirelessly
using Miracast technology.
• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to project up to four images at the same
time by splitting the projected screen. You can project images from
computers on the network, or from smartphones or tablet devices on which
Epson iProjection is installed.
See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for details.
Projector Features 13
a• When projecting images using a wireless LAN, you must install the
Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module, and then set up your
projector and computer for wireless projection
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
Depending on your projector model, you may need to purchase the
optional wireless LAN module. See the Quick Reference for a list of
items supplied with your projector.
• Some models have built-in wireless LAN modules
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530
U).
• You can download the necessary software and manuals from the
following Web site:
epson.sn
• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) to connect your projector and mobile
device wirelessly using the app available on the App Store or Google Play.
aAny fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or
Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) to connect your projector and
Chromebook device wirelessly using the app available on the Chrome Web
Store.
aAny fees incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store
are the responsibility of the customer.
gg Related Links
• "Wired Network Projection" p.130
• "Wireless Network Projection" p.133
• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)"
p.145
Managing over a Network
Epson Projector Professional Tool to adjust the projected image or monitor
the projector from your computer over a network.
See the Epson Projector Professional Tool Operation Guide for details.
aYou can download the necessary software and manuals from the
following Web site:
epson.sn
gg Related Links
• "Supported Features for the Epson Projector Professional Tool" p.258
Projecting for Exhibitions
Your projector allows you to project your content for exhibitions as digital
signage.
Projector Features 14
• Content Playback mode to play your playlists, and add color and shape
effects to your projected image.
• You can use one of the following methods to create content played in
Content Playback mode.
• The Epson Projector Content Manager software allows you to create
playlists and save them on an external storage device. You can also add
color and shape effects to your projected image, and schedule playlists.
See the Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide for details.
• Epson Web Control allows you to create playlists using a Web browser
and save them to an external storage device connected to a projector on a
network. You can also add color and shape effects to your projected
image.
• The Epson Creative Projection app allows you to create content on iOS
devices. You can also transfer content to the projector wirelessly.
You can download Epson Creative Projection from the App Store. Any
fees incurred when communicating with the App Store are the
responsibility of the customer.
aYou can download the necessary software and manuals from the
following Web site:
epson.sn
gg Related Links
• "Projecting in Content Playback Mode" p.94
• "Supported Features for Epson Projector Content Manager" p.257
Projector Parts and Functions 15
The following sections explain the projector parts and their functions.
All of the features in this guide are explained using illustrations of EB‑L735U
unless otherwise mentioned.
The shape of the projector part may vary depending on the model of your
projector.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Parts - Front/Top" p.15
• "Projector Parts - Rear" p.16
• "Projector Parts - Base" p.17
• "Projector Parts - Interface Ports" p.17
• "Projector Parts - Control Panel" p.18
• "Projector Parts - Remote Control" p.19
Projector Parts - Front/Top
EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U
EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U
Name Function
AAir intake vent Takes in air to cool the projector internally.
BFront adjustable foot When setup on a surface such as a desk, extend the foot
to adjust the position of the image.
CFocus ring Adjusts the image focus.
DZoom ring
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L720U/EB‑L630U
/EB‑L530U/EB‑L520U
)
Adjusts the image size.
ELens Images are projected from here.
FAir intake vent (air
filter)
Takes in air to cool the projector internally.
GCable cover
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Cover for the rear interface ports section.
Loosen the two screws and pull the cover off when
connecting cables for external devices or installing the
wireless LAN module.
HIndicators Indicates the projector's status.
Projector Parts and Functions 16
Name Function
IVertical lens shift dial
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Turn the dial to move the position of the projected
image up or down.
JHorizontal lens shift
dial
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Turn the dial to move the position of the projected
image left or right.
KRemote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
LSpeaker Outputs audio.
MAir exhaust vent Exhaust vent for air used to cool the projector
internally.
Caution
While projecting, do not put your face or
hands near the air exhaust vent, and do not
place objects that may become warped or
damaged by heat near the vent. Hot air from
the air exhaust vent could cause burns,
warping, or accidents to occur.
NRemote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
OLens cover Attach when not using the projector to protect the lens.
gg Related Links
• "Air Filter and Vent Maintenance" p.214
• "Projector Indicator Status" p.223
• "Remote Control Operation" p.40
• "Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring" p.66
• "Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring" p.69
• "Attaching and Removing the Cable Cover" p.38
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift" p.53
Projector Parts - Rear
Name Function
ASecurity slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver
Security System manufactured by Kensington.
BPower inlet Connects the power cord to the projector.
CInterface ports Connects cables for external devices.
DControl panel Operates the projector.
ERemote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Parts - Interface Ports" p.17
• "Installing a Security Cable" p.128
Projector Parts and Functions 17
Projector Parts - Base
Name Function
AFront adjustable foot When setup on a surface such as a desk, extend the foot
to adjust the position of the image.
BCeiling mount fixing
points (four points)
Attach the optional ceiling mount here when
suspending the projector from a ceiling.
CWire clamp fixing
point
When you use the optional ceiling mount, fix the
carabiner here to attach the safety wire and prevent the
projector from falling from the ceiling or wall.
DRear feet When setup on a surface such as a desk, turn to extend
and retract to adjust the horizontal tilt.
Name Function
EScrew holes for cable
cover
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Screw holes to fix the cable cover in place.
FSecurity cable
attachment point
Pass a commercially available wire lock through here
and lock it in place.
Warning
Do not attach the safety wire to this point.
GAir filter cover screws Screws to fix the air filter cover in place.
HFixing points (four
points)
Use these points to attach a commercially available
mount compatible with the VESA Mounting Interface
Standard (100 × 100 mm) when installing the projector
on a wall, or suspending the projector from a ceiling.
gg Related Links
• "Installing a Security Cable" p.128
Projector Parts - Interface Ports
Projector Parts and Functions 18
Name Function
AComputer1 port Inputs image signal from a computer.
BAudio1 port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the
Computer1 port.
CAudio2 port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the
Computer2 port.
DAudio Out port Outputs audio from the current input source to an
external speaker.
ERS-232C port Connects an RS-232C cable to control the projector
from a computer. (You do not need to use this port
normally.)
FComputer2/Monitor
Out port
When Monitor Out Port is set to Monitor Out in the
projector's Signal I/O menu, analog RGB signals input
from the Computer1 port are output to an external
monitor. You cannot output signals input from other
ports.
When Monitor Out Port is set to Computer2 in the
projector's Signal I/O menu, image signal from a
computer is input.
GHDMI Out port
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Outputs video signals to an external monitor.
Connecting an HDMI cables from this port to the
HDMI port of another projectors lets you create and
project a single unified image.
This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.
HHDBaseT port Connects a LAN cable to the optional HDBaseT
Transmitter.
This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.
IHDMI2 port Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video
equipment and computers.
This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.
JHDMI1 port
KDC Out port
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U
/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630
SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L53
0U)
Provides a connection for an optional or commercially
available streaming media player allowing you to power
it.
USB data transfer is not available.
LLAN port Connects a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Name Function
MService port This port is used for batch settings and firmware
update.
NWireless LAN module
fixing screw
Secures the wireless LAN module cover.
OUSB-A port Connects a USB device and projects movies or images.
Use to connect the optional document camera.
Use to connect the wireless LAN module.
Use to pair the optional wireless transmitter.
Use to connect a USB memory device to save error and
operation log files.
PCable holder Pass a commercially available cable tie through here to
secure cables.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Connections" p.30
• "Wireless Network Projection" p.133
Projector Parts - Control Panel
Projector Parts and Functions 19
Name Function
APower button ( ) Turns the projector on or off.
B[Source Search]
button
Changes to the next input source.
C[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
DLeft arrow button Displays the Control Panel Lock screen.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
EDown arrow button Displays a test pattern.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
F[Enter] button ( ) Enters the current selection and moves to the next level
while displaying the projector's menu or help.
When projecting an analog RGB signal from the
Computer port, optimizes the Analog Signal
Adjustment settings (Tracking,Sync., and Position).
GRight arrow button Displays the Information screen.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
H[Esc] button Stops the current function.
Moves back to the previous menu level while
displaying the projector's menu.
IUp arrow button Displays the Geometry Correction screen.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
J[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting an Image Source" p.70
• "Adjusting the Menu Settings" p.177
Projector Parts - Remote Control
Projector Parts and Functions 20
Name Function
APower button ( ) Turns the projector on or off.
B[HDMI] button Switches the image source between the HDMI1 and
HDMI2 ports.
C[Computer] button Switches the image source to the Computer1 and
Computer2 ports.
DNumeric buttons Enters numbers in the projector's menu while holding
down the [Num] button.
E[Auto] button When projecting an analog RGB signal from the
Computer port, optimizes the Analog Signal
Adjustment settings (Tracking,Sync., and Position).
F[Num] button Hold down this button to enter numbers using the
numeric buttons.
G[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.
HArrow buttons Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu.
I[Enter] button ( ) Enters the current selection and moves to the next level
while displaying the projector's menu.
J[User] button Performs settings assigned in the User Button setting
in the projector's Management menu.
K[Color Mode] button Changes the color mode.
L[Aspect] button Changes the aspect mode.
M[E-Zoom] +/–
buttons
Resizes the projected image.
N[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
O[Split] button Projects up to four images from different image sources
simultaneously by splitting the projected screen.
P[Home] button Displays and closes the Home screen.
Q[Freeze] button Pauses or resumes images.
R[Volume] up/down
buttons
Adjusts the speaker volume.
S[Default] button Returns the selected setting to its default value.
Name Function
T[Esc] button Stops the current function.
Moves back to the previous menu level while
displaying the projector's menu.
U[ID] button Hold down this button and press the numeric buttons
to select the ID for the projector you want to operate
using the remote control.
V[LAN] button Switches the image source to the network connected
device.
W[USB] button Selects the USB-A port as the image source.
X[Source Search]
button
Switches to the next input source.
YRemote control light
emitting area
Outputs remote control signals.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting in Content Playback Mode" p.94
• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.74
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.72
• "Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)" p.104
• "Home Screen" p.43
• "Selecting an Image Source" p.70
• "Zooming Images (E-Zoom)" p.103
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.101
• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.86
• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.102
• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.84
• "Setting the Projector ID" p.113
• "Adjusting the Menu Settings" p.177
Projector Placement 22
You can place the projector on almost any flat surface to project an image.
You can also install the projector in a ceiling mount if you want to use it in a
fixed location. An optional ceiling mount is required when suspending the
projector from a ceiling.
You can also use a commercially available mount compatible with the VESA
Mounting Interface Standard (100 × 100 mm).
The projector can be installed at various angles. There is no vertical or
horizontal limit to how the projector can be installed.
Note the following points when selecting a projector location:
• Place the projector on a sturdy, level surface or install it using a compatible
mount.
• Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and
do not place it on top of or next to anything that could block the vents.
• Place the projector so it squarely faces the screen, not at an angle.
Projector Placement 23
Warning
• You must install a ceiling mount when suspending the projector from a ceiling.
If you do not install the projector correctly, it could fall and cause damage or
injury.
• Do not use adhesives on the ceiling mount fixing points to prevent the screws
from loosening, or use lubricants, oils, or similar substances on the projector; the
projector case may crack causing it to fall from its ceiling mount. This could
cause serious injury to anyone under the ceiling mount and could damage the
projector.
• Failure to install the ceiling mount and projector may cause the projector to fall.
After installing the specific Epson mount that supports your projector, make
sure you secure the mount to all of the projector's ceiling mount fixing points.
Also, secure the projector and the mounts using wire that is strong enough to
hold their weight.
• Do not install the projector in a location subject to high levels of dust or
humidity, or in a location subject to smoke or steam. Otherwise, it could cause a
fire or electric shock to occur. The projector's case could also deteriorate and be
damaged causing the projector to fall from the mount.
Examples of environments that could cause the projector to fall due to case
deterioration
• Locations subject to excessive smoke or airborne oil particles, such as factories
or kitchens
• Locations containing volatile solvents or chemicals, such as factories or
laboratories
• Locations where the projector could be subjected to detergents or chemicals,
such as factories or kitchens
• Locations in which aroma oils are often used, such as relaxation rooms
• Near devices that produce excessive smoke, airborne oil particles, or foam at
events
Warning
• Do not cover the projector's air intake or air exhaust vents. If the vents are
covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a fire.
• Do not use or store the projector in locations where it will be subject to dust or
dirt. Otherwise, the quality of the projected image may decline. If the lens or air
filter gets dusty, it may result in a malfunction or fire.
• Do not install the projector on an unstable surface or in a location beyond the
weight specifications of the projector. Otherwise, it could fall or topple causing
an accident and injury.
• When installing the projector in a high position, take measures to prevent falling
by using wires to ensure safety in an emergency, such as an earthquake, and to
prevent accidents. If it is not installed correctly, it could fall causing an accident
and injury.
• Do not install in locations where salt damage could occur, or in locations subject
to corrosive gas such as sulphuric gas from hot springs. Otherwise, corrosion
could cause the projector to fall. It could also cause the projector to malfunction.
Attention
• If you are using the projector at altitudes above 1,500 m, set the High Altitude
Mode setting to On in the projector's Installation menu to ensure the projector's
internal temperature is regulated properly.
• Try not to setup the projector in locations subject to high humidity and dust, or
in locations subject to smoke from fires or tobacco smoke.
gg Related Links
• "Notes on Transporting" p.23
• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.24
• "Projection Distance" p.26
Notes on Transporting
There are many glass parts and precision components inside the projector. To
prevent damage due to impacts when transporting, handle the projector as
follows.
• Remove any equipment connected to the projector.
Projector Placement 24
• Center the lens position by turning the vertical and horizontal lens shift
dials until they click.
• Attach the lens cover that was included with the projector.
• When transporting the projector a long distance or as checked luggage, pack
it in a firm box with cushioning around it and mark the box "Fragile."
• When shipping the projector for repairs, place it in its original packing
materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with cushioning around
the projector. Mark the box "Fragile."
aEpson shall not be liable for any damages incurred during
transportation.
Projector Setup and Installation Options
You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:
Front/Rear
Front Ceiling/Rear Ceiling
Select the correct Projection option in the projector's Installation menu
according to the installation method being used. If necessary, turn on the Inv
Direction Button setting in the projector's Operation menu and adjust the
Menu Rotation setting in the projector's Display menu.
gg Related Links
• "Precautions on Installation" p.24
• "Projection Modes" p.48
Precautions on Installation
Note the following precautions when installing the projector.
Projector Placement 25
Attention
• If the projector is installed at an angle, it should be installed by qualified
technicians using mounting hardware designed for use with this projector.
• Install the projector appropriately to prevent it from falling down.
• Use M4 screws (up to a depth of 9 mm) to fix the projector's ceiling mount
fixing points and the mounting hardware at four points.
Installation space
Attention
Be sure to leave the following amount of space around the projector so as not to
block the air exhaust and intake vents.
A10 cm
B20 cm
C40 cm
Projector Placement 26
Installation space (When installing multiple projectors side by side)
Attention
• If you are installing multiple projectors next to each other, make sure hot air
from the exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent of another projector.
A150 cm
• If you use a partition, you can narrow the space between the projectors.
A20 cm
B40 cm
* Partition
Projection Distance
The distance at which you place the projector from the screen determines the
approximate size of the image. The image size increases the farther the
projector is from the screen, but can vary depending on the zoom factor,
aspect ratio, and other settings.
See the Appendix for details about how far to place the projector from the
screen based on the size of the projected image.
gg Related Links
• "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.245
Installing the Safety Wire 27
You can install the safety wire to prevent the projector from falling from the
ceiling.
Warning
Be sure to use the safety wire provided with the Epson ceiling mount. The safety
wire is available as an optional Safety Wire Set ELPWR01.
gg Related Links
• "When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB22" p.27
• "When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB30" p.28
When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB22
You can attach a safety wire to your projector for increased safety as shown.
Before you start, make sure you have firmly installed the ELPMB22 ceiling
mount on the projector and have the following items included in the safety
wire set:
• Safety wire × 1
• Carabiner × 2
• Wire clamp × 1
• Attaching screw (M4 × 10 mm) × 1
aFor details on installing the ELPMB22, see the Ceiling Mount
ELPMB22/ELPMB23 Instruction Manual.
aAttach a carabiner to the hole on the ceiling mount, and tighten the
carabiner lock.
bAttach the wire clamp to another carabiner, and then use the screw to
fix the wire clamp to the wire clamp fixing point on the projector.
Installing the Safety Wire 28
cLoop the safety wire through the carabiner on the ceiling mount, and
attach both ends to the carabiner on the projector.
Warning
Do not attach the safety wire to the security cable attachment point.
dTighten the carabiner lock.
When Using the Ceiling Mount ELPMB30
You can attach a safety wire to your projector for increased safety as shown.
Before you start, make sure you have firmly installed the ELPMB30 ceiling
mount on the projector and have the following items included in the safety
wire set:
• Safety wire × 1
• Carabiner × 2 (Only one carabiner is used for the ELPMB30.)
• Wire clamp × 1
• Attaching screw (M4 × 10 mm) × 1
aFor details on installing the ELPMB30, see the ELPMB30 User's Guide.
aAttach the wire clamp to the carabiner, and then use the screw to fix
the wire clamp to the screw into the wire clamp fixing point on the
projector.
Installing the Safety Wire 29
bLoop the safety wire through the hole in the ceiling mount, and then
attach both ends to the carabiner.
Warning
Do not attach the safety wire to the security cable attachment point.
cTighten the carabiner lock.
Projector Connections 30
See these sections to connect the projector to a variety of projection sources.
Attention
Check the shape and orientation of the connectors on any cable you plan to
connect. Do not force a connector into a port if it does not fit. The device or your
projector could be damaged or could malfunction.
aSee the Quick Reference for a list of cables supplied with your projector.
Purchase optional or commercially available cables when necessary.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Computer" p.30
• "Connecting to Video Sources" p.31
• "Connecting to External USB Devices" p.32
• "Connecting to a Document Camera" p.33
• "Connecting to a Streaming Media Player" p.33
• "Connecting to an HDBaseT Transmitter" p.34
• "Connecting to External Devices" p.34
• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.36
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Connecting to a Computer
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect a computer to the
projector.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio" p.30
• "Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio" p.31
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio
You can connect the projector to your computer using a VGA computer
cable.
You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a
commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable.
a• To connect a computer that does not have a VGA video port, you
need an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's VGA
video port.
• To project an image source connected to the Computer2/Monitor
Out port, set Monitor Out Port to Computer2 in the projector's
Signal I/O menu.
• You can also set the port to input audio when projecting the
computer source as the Audio Output setting in the projector's
Signal I/O menu.
• Make sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".
aConnect the VGA computer cable to your computer's monitor port.
bConnect the other end to a Computer port on the projector.
cTighten the screws on the VGA connector.
dConnect the audio cable to your laptop's headphone or audio-out jack,
or your desktop's speaker or audio-out port.
Projector Connections 31
eConnect the other end to the Audio port that corresponds to the
Computer port you are using.
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio
If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using
an HDMI cable and send the computer's audio with the projected image.
aConnect the HDMI cable to your computer's HDMI output port.
bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.
aIf you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,
connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your
computer's audio out port. Select the audio input port you connected
to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the projector's Signal I/O
menu.
Connecting to Video Sources
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect video devices to the
projector.
a• If the port on the device you connect has an unusual shape, use the
cable supplied with the device or an optional cable to connect to the
projector.
• The cable differs depending on the output signal from the connected
video devices.
• Some video devices are capable of outputting different types of
signals. See your video device manual to confirm what type of signals
can be output.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to an HDMI Video Source" p.31
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source
If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector
using an HDMI cable and send the image source's audio with the projected
image.
Attention
Do not turn on the video source before connecting it to the projector. Doing so
could damage the projector.
aConnect the HDMI cable to your video source's HDMI output port.
Projector Connections 32
bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.
aIf you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,
connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your
video source's audio out port. Select the audio input port you
connected to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the projector's
Signal I/O menu.
Connecting to External USB Devices
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external USB devices to
the projector.
gg Related Links
• "USB Device Projection" p.32
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.32
• "Disconnecting a USB Device" p.33
USB Device Projection
You can project images and other content without using a computer or video
device by connecting any of these devices to your projector:
• USB flash drive
• Digital camera or smartphone
• USB hard drive
a• Digital cameras or smartphones must be USB-mounted devices, not
TWAIN-compliant devices, and must be USB Mass Storage Class-
compliant.
• USB hard drives must meet these requirements:
• USB Mass Storage Class-compliant (not all USB Mass Storage
Class devices are supported)
• Formatted in FAT16/32
• Self-powered by their own AC power supplies (bus-powered hard
drives are not recommended)
• Avoid using hard drives with multiple partitions
You can also project playlists that contain images and movies saved on a USB
flash drive in Content Playback mode.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting in Content Playback Mode" p.94
• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.89
Connecting to a USB Device
You can connect your USB device to the projector's USB-A port and use it to
project images and other content.
aIf your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an
electrical outlet.
Projector Connections 33
bConnect the USB cable or USB flash drive to the projector's USB-A port
as shown.
Attention
• Use the USB cable supplied with or specified for use with the device.
• Do not connect a USB hub or a USB cable longer than 3 meters, or the
device may not operate correctly.
cConnect the other end to your device, if necessary.
Disconnecting a USB Device
When you have finished projecting with a connected USB device, disconnect
the device from the projector.
aTurn off and unplug the device, if necessary.
bDisconnect the USB device from the projector.
Connecting to a Document Camera
You can connect a document camera to your projector to project images
viewed by the camera.
The connection method varies depending on your Epson document camera
model. See the document camera manual for details.
Connecting to a Streaming Media Player
You can connect your streaming media player to the projector's HDMI port.
By connecting the power supply USB cable, you can power the streaming
media player from the projector
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
aTo keep supplying power to the optional streaming media player when
the projector is not projecting images, select Always On as the USB
Power setting in the projector's Operation menu.
aConnect your streaming media player to the projector's HDMI port.
bConnect the power supply USB cable to the projector's DC Out port.
Projector Connections 34
cConnect the other end to the streaming media player's USB port (Type-
B).
Connecting to an HDBaseT Transmitter
To send an HDMI or RS-232C signal over a long distance, you can connect
the projector to an optional HDBaseT transmitter using a 100Base-TX
network cable. This is useful when you want to send a signal to or control the
projector from a remote location, such as in a hall or event site, since you can
use a network cable up to 100 m in length. To ensure proper data
transmission, use a Category 5e STP cable or better. However, operation is
not guaranteed for all input/output devices and environments.
a• To enable communication from the Ethernet and serial ports on the
transmitter, set the Control Communications setting to On in the
projector's Signal I/O menu. Turning on this setting disables the
projector's LAN and RS-232C ports.
sSignal I/O >HDBaseT >Control Communications
• If you connected an Extron XTP transmitter or switcher to the
projector's HDBaseT port, set the Extron XTP setting to On in the
projector's Signal I/O menu.
sSignal I/O >HDBaseT >Extron XTP
• If you want to control the projector when the projector does not
project any images, set the A/V Output setting to Always On in the
projector's Signal I/O menu.
aTurn off the projector and HDBaseT transmitter.
aMake sure the projector and HDBaseT transmitter are turned off
when connecting or disconnecting a network cable between the
two devices.
bConnect one end of the network cable to the HDBaseT port on the
transmitter.
cConnect the other end to the projector's HDBaseT port.
aSee the documentation that came with the HDBaseT transmitter
for instructions on connecting it to your video device or
computer.
dTurn on the projector and HDBaseT transmitter.
Connecting to External Devices
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external devices to the
projector.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor" p.35
• "Connecting to a VGA Monitor" p.35
• "Connecting to External Speakers" p.35
Projector Connections 35
Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor
You can connect an external HDMI monitor to the projector's HDMI Out
port and use it to display images from the current input source
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
a• You cannot display the Home screen on an external HDMI monitor.
• You can only display images from a Screen Mirroring source when
HDMI Out Setting is set to Off and HDMI Out Image Output is
set to On.
sMulti-Projection >HDMI Out Setting
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen
Mirroring >HDMI Out Image Output
• When HDMI Out Setting is set to Pass Through, you can only
display images from the HDMI1, HDMI2, and HDBaseT ports.
aConnect the HDMI cable to your monitor's HDMI input port.
bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI Out port.
Connecting to a VGA Monitor
If you connected the projector to a computer using a Computer port, you can
also connect an external monitor to the projector. This lets you see your
presentation on the external monitor even when the projected image is not
visible.
To output images to an external monitor, set the Monitor Out Port setting to
Monitor Out in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
a• If you want to output images to an external monitor when the
projector does not project any images, set the A/V Output setting to
Always On in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
• Monitors that use a refresh rate of less than 60 Hz may not be able to
display images correctly.
aMake sure your computer is connected to the projector's Computer
port.
a• If there are two computer ports, make sure you use the
Computer1 port.
• Only analog RGB signals from the Computer1 port can be
output to an external monitor. You cannot output signals
input from other ports.
bConnect the external monitor's cable to your projector's Monitor Out
port.
Connecting to External Speakers
You can connect the projector to external self-powered speakers. You can
control the volume using the projector's remote control.
Projector Connections 36
To output audio from external speakers, set the Audio Out Device setting to
Projector in the projector's Signal I/O menu. When an audio/video system is
not connected to the projector, audio is output from the external speakers
even if Audio Out Device is set to AV System.
sSignal I/O >HDMI Link >Audio Out Device
a• If you want to output audio from the external speakers when the
projector does not project any images, set the A/V Output setting to
Always On in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
• You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers.
• The projector's built-in speaker system is disabled when you connect
external speakers.
aMake sure your computer or video source is connected to the projector
with both audio and video cables as necessary.
bLocate the appropriate cable to connect your external speakers, such as
a stereo mini-jack-to-pin-jack cable, or another type of cable or adapter.
cConnect one end of the cable to your external speakers as necessary.
dConnect the stereo mini-jack end of the cable to your projector's Audio
Out port.
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model
You can create a single unified image projected from multiple projectors
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U). The
image is unified horizontally.
aIf you create one large image vertically or connect five or more
projectors, you can use the Tiling setting in the projector's Multi-
Projection menu.
aConnect projector to the computer using the HDMI cable or the
HDBaseT transmitter using the network cable and then connect the
projectors using the HDMI cables as shown.
a• If you are connecting three or more projectors, connect the
projectors in a chain as shown.
• When installing the projectors, make sure hot air from the
exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent of another
projector.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
Projector Connections 37
cSelect the Color Mode setting to Multi-Projection in the projector's
Image menu for all of the projectors.
dSelect the necessary HDMI Out Setting setting in the projector's Multi-
Projection menu. See the list of settings for more details.
eSelect the necessary settings in the projector's Multi-Projection menu
to create a seamless unified image area.
fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
gg Related Links
• "Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections" p.37
• "Precautions on Installation" p.24
• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.112
Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections
See the following tables for details on menu settings when you connect
multiple projectors to create a horizontally wide screen. You can connect up
to four projectors in a chain.
Image Settings
Setting Item A B C
Projector on the left
(connected to the
device)
Projectors in the
middle
Projectors on the
right
Color Mode Multi-Projection Multi-Projection Multi-Projection
Multi-Projection Settings
Setting Item A B C
Projector on the left
(connected to the
device)
Projectors in the
middle
Projector on the
right
HDMI Out Setting Pass Through Pass Through Pass Through
Number of
Projectors
Specifies the number of projectors connected in a chain
Order Specifies the position of this projector in number order from
left to right
Attaching and Removing the Cable Cover 38
When suspending the projector from a ceiling, you can attach the cable cover
that came with your projector to hide the attached cables from view
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
aPass a commercially available cable tie through the cable holder and tie
the cables together.
Caution
Do not bundle the power cord to the other cables. Otherwise, a fire may
occur.
bPlace the cable cover on the projector as shown, guiding the cables
through the notch on the base of the cable cover.
cTighten the cable cover screws.
To remove the cover, loosen the cover screws and pull the cover off of
the projector.
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 39
The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector.
Attention
Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the batteries.
aReplace the batteries as soon as they run out. The remote control uses
two AA manganese or alkaline batteries.
aRemove the battery cover as shown.
bRemove the old batteries, if necessary.
aDispose of used batteries according to local regulations.
cInsert the batteries with the +and –ends facing as shown.
Warning
Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the batteries are inserted the correct way. If the batteries are not used
correctly, they could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the
product.
dReplace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 40
gg Related Links
• "Remote Control Operation" p.40
Remote Control Operation
The remote control lets you control the projector from almost anywhere in
the room.
Make sure that you aim the remote control at the projector's receivers within
the distance and angles listed here.
aAvoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent
lights or in direct sunlight, or the projector may not respond to
commands. If you are not going to use the remote control for a long
time, remove the batteries.
Using Basic Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's basic features.
gg Related Links
• "Turning On the Projector" p.42
• "Turning Off the Projector" p.44
• "Setting the Date and Time" p.45
• "Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus" p.47
• "Projection Modes" p.48
• "Setting the Screen Type" p.50
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift" p.53
• "Displaying a Test Pattern" p.55
• "Adjusting the Image Height" p.56
• "Image Shape" p.57
• "Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring" p.66
• "Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom" p.67
• "Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring" p.69
• "Selecting an Image Source" p.70
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.72
• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.74
• "Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment" p.75
• "Adjusting the Image Color" p.76
• "Adjusting the Image Resolution" p.79
• "Adjusting the Brightness" p.81
• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.84
Turning On the Projector 42
Turn on the computer or video equipment you want to use after you turn on
the projector.
aRemove the lens cover.
bConnect the power cord to the projector's power inlet and plug it into
an electrical outlet.
The projector's power indicator turns blue. This indicates that the
projector is receiving power, but is not yet turned on (it is in standby
mode).
cPress the power button on the control panel or remote control to turn
on the projector.
The projector beeps and the status indicator flashes blue as the
projector warms up. Once the projector is warmed up, the status
indicator stops flashing and turns blue.
a• When Quick Startup is enabled in the projector's Operation
menu, the projector becomes ready for use in several seconds
the next time you press the power button.
Try the following if you do not see a projected image.
• Turn on the connected computer or video device.
• Change the screen output from the computer when using a laptop
computer.
• Insert a DVD or other video media, and press play (if necessary).
• Press the [Source Search] button on the control panel or remote control to
detect the source.
• Press the button for the desired video source on the remote control.
• If the Home screen is displayed, select the source you want to project.
Warning
• Never look into the projector lens when the light source is on. This can damage
your eyes and is especially dangerous for children.
• When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure
there is no one looking into the lens.
• During projection, do not block the light from the projector with a book or other
objects. If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light
shines becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also, the
lens may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the projector to
malfunction. To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function, or turn off the
projector.
a• When the Direct Power On setting is set to On in the projector's
Operation menu, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in.
Note that the projector also turns on automatically in cases such as
recovery from a power outage.
• If you select a specific port as the Auto Power On setting in the
projector's Operation menu, the projector turns on as soon as it
detects a signal or cable connection from that port.
Turning On the Projector 43
gg Related Links
• "Home Screen" p.43
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
Home Screen
The Home screen feature allows you to easily select an image source and
access useful functions. You can display the Home screen by pressing the
[Home] button on the remote control.
a• The Home screen is also displayed when you turn on the projector
and no signal is being input.
• When Connection Guide Display is set to On in the projector's
Network menu, the connection guide for the wireless transmitter
(Epson Wireless Presentation) is displayed instead of the Home
screen when no signal is being input.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >Connection Guide Display
Press the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to select a
menu item, and then press [Enter].
ASelects the source you want to project.
A check mark appears on the upper right of the current input source.
You can check a preview of the current input image for most sources as a
thumbnail (other than the USB input source in Content Playback mode).
BProjects images from two or four different image sources simultaneously in a
grid format.
CShares your projected screen image with other projectors connected to the same
network.
DDisplays the connection guide. You can select the wireless connection methods
according to the devices you are using, such as smartphones or computers.
ELets you select the following common projector settings (settings may vary
depending on other selected settings):
•Color Mode
•Brightness Level
•Volume
•E-Zoom (EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U)
•Geometry Correction (H/V-Keystone and Quick Corner are available.)
•Aspect
aThe Geometry Correction setting is only displayed when
Fixed Installation is set to Off and Geometry
Correction is set to H/V-Keystone or Quick Corner in
the projector's Installation menu.
FMoves to the previous or next page if there are more than nine available input
sources.
GDisplays the projector name and the projector keyword.
HDisplays the current time.
aThe Home screen disappears after 10 minutes of inactivity.
gg Related Links
• "Screen Sharing" p.152
• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.86
Turning Off the Projector 44
Turn off the projector after use.
a• Turn off this product when it is not in use to prolong the life of the
projector. Light source life varies depending on the mode selected,
environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.
• If the Light Source Calibration setting is set to Run Periodically in
the projector's Management menu, light source calibration starts
automatically if you turn off the projector and the following
conditions are present:
• 100 hours have passed since the last light source calibration
• You have used the projector continuously for more than 20
minutes
• Since the projector supports the direct shutdown feature, it can be
turned off directly using the breaker.
aPress the power button on the control panel or remote control.
The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.
bPress the power button again. (To leave it on, press any other button.)
The projector beeps twice, the light source turns off, and the status
indicator turns off.
cTo transport or store the projector, make sure the power indicator is
blue (but not flashing) and the status indicator is off, then unplug the
power cord.
dAttach the lens cover.
Setting the Date and Time 45
You can set the date and time for the projector.
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Management setting and press [Enter].
dSelect the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].
eSelect the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].
You see this screen:
fSelect Date, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter
today's date.
gSelect Time, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter the
current time.
hSelect Time Difference (UTC), press [Enter], and set the time
difference from Coordinated Universal Time.
iWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
Setting the Date and Time 46
jTo activate daylight saving time, select the Daylight Saving Time
setting and set it to On. Then select settings.
kWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
lTo update the time automatically through an Internet time server,
select the Internet Time setting and set it to On. Then select settings.
mWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
nPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus 47
If you want to view the projector's menus and messages in another language,
you can change the Language setting.
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Management setting and press [Enter].
dSelect the Language setting and press [Enter].
eSelect the language you want to use and press [Enter].
fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Projection Modes 48
Depending on how you positioned the projector, you may need to change the
projection mode so your images project correctly.
•Front lets you project from a table in front of the screen.
•Front/Ceiling flips the image over top-to-bottom to project upside-down
from a ceiling or wall mount.
•Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent
screen.
•Rear/Ceiling flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to project
from a ceiling or wall mount and behind a translucent screen.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control" p.48
• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus" p.48
• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.24
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote
Control
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bHold down the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control for 5 seconds.
The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.
cTo change projection back to the original mode, hold down the [A/V
Mute] button for 5 seconds again.
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom
and/or left-to-right using the projector menus.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Projection and press [Enter].
Projection Modes 49
eSelect a projection mode and press [Enter].
fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Setting the Screen Type 50
You can use the Screen Type setting to match the aspect ratio of the displayed
image to the screen you are using.
a• This setting is unavailable when using one of the following input
sources:
• USB
• LAN
• You cannot change the Screen Type setting when the Content
Playback setting is set to On in the projector's Operation menu.
• If you change the Screen Type setting, the Geometry Correction
settings are initialized.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Screen Type and press [Enter].
eSelect your screen's aspect ratio and press [Enter].
fPress [Menu] to exit the menus.
aYou may need to restart the projector. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
gAdjust the aspect ratio for the projected image, if necessary.
aWhen the Screen Type setting changes, the EDID settings are
automatically adjusted.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position" p.50
• "Changing the Horizontal Position of the Image Using Screen Shift" p.51
Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position
You can adjust the image position if there are margins between the edge of
the image and the projected screen frame.
Setting the Screen Type 51
aYou cannot adjust the screen position if the Screen Type setting is set
to 16:10.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Screen Position, and press [Enter].
eUse the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to adjust
the position of the image.
fWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
Changing the Horizontal Position of the Image Using
Screen Shift
You can specify the horizontal position of the image inside the ultra-wide
display when the Screen Type is set to 16:6.
a• Available only when Aspect is set to Auto for the HDMI, Computer,
and HDBaseT sources in the projector's Image menu.
• Unavailable in the split screen projection.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
Setting the Screen Type 52
bPress the [4], [5], or [6] button on the remote control.
cAdjust the horizontal position of the projected image by pressing the
following numeric buttons on the remote control:
• [4] to project the image in the left position.
• [5] to project the image in the center.
• [6] to project the image in the right position.
aThe setting is saved until the projector is turned off.
dWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift 53
If you cannot install the projector directly in front of the screen, you can
adjust the position of the projected image using the lens shift feature
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
Attention
When adjusting the image position with the vertical lens shift, adjust it by moving
the image from the bottom to the top. If you adjust it from the top to the bottom,
the image position may move down slightly after adjusting.
a• Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the
focus, zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy.
• Keep the vertical and horizontal lens shift dials in their center
positions for the clearest picture.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bTurn the vertical and horizontal lens shift dials on the projector to
adjust the position of the projected image as necessary.
ACenter of lens
BProjected image when the lens is set to the home position
CMaximum range: V × 50%
DWhen the horizontal direction is at the maximum value: V × 12%
Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift 54
aYou cannot move the image horizontally when the lens is shifted
vertically all the way.
Displaying a Test Pattern 55
You can display a test pattern to adjust the projected image without
connecting a computer or video device.
a• The test pattern's shape is determined by the Screen Type setting. Be
sure to set the correct screen type before adjusting with the test
pattern.
• To set menu items that cannot be set while the test pattern is being
displayed or to fine-tune the projected image, project an image from
the connected device.
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the down arrow button on the control panel.
A test pattern is displayed.
aYou can also display a test pattern from the projector's
Installation menu.
cPress the left or right arrow button on the remote control, or press
[Enter] on the control panel to cycle through the available test patterns.
dAdjust the image as necessary.
eTo remove the test pattern, press [Esc].
Adjusting the Image Height 56
If you are projecting from a table or other flat surface and the image is too
high or low, you can adjust the image height using the projector's adjustable
feet.
The larger the angle of tilt, the harder it becomes to focus. Locate the
projector so that it only needs to be tilted at a small angle.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bTo adjust the image height, rotate the front foot to extend or retract it.
AExtend the front foot
BRetract the front foot
cIf the image is tilted, rotate the rear feet to adjust their height.
AExtend the rear foot
BRetract the rear foot
If the projected image is unevenly rectangular, you need to adjust the image
shape.
gg Related Links
• "Image Shape" p.57
Image Shape 57
You can project an even, rectangular image by placing the projector directly
in front of the center of the screen and keeping it level. If you place the
projector at an angle to the screen, or tilt it up or down, or off to the side, you
may need to correct the image shape.
After correction, your image is slightly smaller.
For the best quality images, we recommend adjusting the installation position
of the projector to achieve the correct image size and shape.
gg Related Links
• "Correcting Image Shape with H/V Keystone" p.57
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.59
• "Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction" p.61
• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.63
• "Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory" p.65
Correcting Image Shape with H/V Keystone
You can use the projector's H/V-Keystone setting to correct the shape of an
image that is unevenly rectangular on the sides.
You can correct images up to 30º right, left, up, or down.
a• If you need to change the Screen Type and Screen Position settings,
change them first.
• You cannot combine with other correction methods.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
The Geometry Correction screen is displayed.
aYou can also access the Geometry Correction screen by pressing
the up arrow button on the control panel.
eSelect H/V-Keystone and press [Enter]. Then press [Enter] again.
Image Shape 58
You see the H/V-Keystone adjustment screen:
fUse the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to select
between vertical and horizontal keystone correction and to adjust the
image shape as necessary.
•V-Keystone
•H-Keystone
aIf you have adjusted the position of the projected image by using
the lens shift feature, adjust the V-Balance and H-Balance
settings as necessary
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L5
30U).
•V-Balance
•H-Balance
gWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
After correction, your image is slightly smaller.
aTo save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select
Save Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the
memory.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save
Memory
Image Shape 59
Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner
You can use the projector's Quick Corner setting to correct the shape and size
of an image that is unevenly rectangular.
aIf you change the Screen Type and Screen Position settings, the
adjustments are reset.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
You see the Geometry Correction screen.
Image Shape 60
eSelect Quick Corner and press [Enter]. Then press [Enter] again if
necessary.
You see the area selection screen.
fUse the arrow buttons to select the area of the image you want to
adjust. Then press [Enter].
aTo reset the Quick Corner corrections, hold down [Esc] for
about 2 seconds while the area selection screen is displayed, and
then select Yes.
gPress the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary.
To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].
a• You can also select the area by pressing the following numeric
buttons on the remote control:
• [1] selects the upper left area.
• [3] selects the upper right area.
• [7] selects the lower left area.
• [9] selects the lower right area.
• If you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further
in the direction indicated by the gray triangle.
hRepeat steps 6 and 7 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.
iWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
The Geometry Correction setting is now set to Quick Corner in the
projector's Installation menu.
Image Shape 61
The next time you press the up arrow button on the control panel, the area
selection screen is displayed.
aTo save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save
Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory
Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction
You can use the projector's Arc Correction setting to adjust the shape of an
image projected on a curved or spherical surface.
aIf you change the Screen Type and Screen Position settings, the
adjustments are reset.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
You see the Geometry Correction screen.
Image Shape 62
eSelect Arc Correction and press [Enter].
You see the Arc Correction screen.
fSelect Arc Correction and press [Enter].
You see the area selection screen.
gUse the arrow buttons to select the area of the image you want to
adjust, then press [Enter].
hPress the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape of the selected area as
necessary.
To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].
aIf you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further in
the direction indicated by the gray triangle.
iRepeat steps 7 and 8 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.
jWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
Image Shape 63
a• You can fine tune the corrected results. Use Quick Corner to adjust
the tilt of the image, and then use Point Correction for fine tuning.
Select Quick Corner or Point Correction on the screen in step 6.
• To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save
Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory
• To reset the Arc Correction settings, hold down [Esc] for about 2
seconds while the area selection screen is displayed, and then select
Yes.
gg Related Links
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.59
• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.63
Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction
You can use the projector's Point Correction setting to fine-tune the image
shape in portions of an image. The image is divided into a grid which allows
you to move intersection points on the grid as necessary to correct distortion.
aIf you change the Screen Type and Screen Position settings, the
adjustments are reset.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
You see the Geometry Correction screen.
Image Shape 64
eSelect Point Correction and press [Enter].
fSelect Point Correction and press [Enter].
aFor fine tuning, select Quick Corner to correct the shape and
size of an image roughly, and then select Point Correction to
adjust them precisely.
gSelect the point number and press [Enter].
You see the grid on the projected image.
aIf you want to change the grid color for visibility, press [Esc],
then select a different Pattern Color setting in the Point
Correction menu.
hUse the arrow buttons to move to the point you want to correct, then
press [Enter].
iUse the arrow buttons to correct distortion as necessary.
jTo correct any remaining points, press [Esc] to return to the previous
screen, then repeat steps 8 and 9.
kWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
a• To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save
Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory
• To reset the Point Correction settings to their original positions,
select Reset on the Point Correction screen.
Image Shape 65
gg Related Links
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.59
Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory
You can load the image shape settings you selected and saved to the
projector's memory and apply them to the current image.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bHold down the [Num] button on the remote control, and then press
the numeric button (1, 2, or 3) that matches the number of the saved
setting.
a• The illustration above is only an example.
• You can also load the saved image shape settings by selecting
Load Memory in the Memory menu.
cWhen you have finished loading the settings, follow the on-screen
instructions.
Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring 66
You can resize the image using the projector's zoom ring
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U/EB‑L520U).
aWait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus,
zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bRotate the zoom ring to enlarge or reduce the image.
Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom 67
You can resize the image using the projector's Digital Zoom
(EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU).
aWait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting for
maximum accuracy.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Digital Zoom and press [Enter].
ePress the right and left arrow buttons on the remote control or the
control panel to adjust the image size.
fWhen you are finished, press [Esc].
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Image Shift" p.67
Adjusting the Image Position Using Image Shift
You can use the Image Shift feature to adjust the image position without
moving the projector (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU).
a• This feature is available when you reduce the image using the Digital
Zoom setting.
• We recommend adjusting the image position at least 20 minutes after
you start projecting, because images are not stable right after turning
on the projector.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom 68
bSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].
cSelect Image Shift and press [Enter].
dUse the arrow buttons to adjust the image position.
ePress the [Esc] button to close the adjustment screen.
The adjustment screen disappears if no operation is performed after
approximately 10 seconds.
a• The Image Shift setting is retained even if the projector is turned off.
You need to re-adjust the position if you change the installation
location or angle of the projector.
Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring 69
You can correct the focus using the focus ring.
aWait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus,
zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy.
Selecting an Image Source 70
When multiple image sources are connected to the projector, such as a
computer and DVD player, you can switch from one image source to the
other.
aMake sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.
bFor video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press
play.
cDo one of the following:
• Press the [Source Search] button on the control panel or remote
control until you see the image from the source you want.
aThis screen is displayed when no image signal is detected.
Check the cable connections between the projector and image
source.
• Press the button for the source you want on the remote control. If
there is more than one port for that source, press the button again to
cycle through the sources.
AHDMI and HDBaseT sources (HDMI1, HDMI2, and HDBaseT ports)
BComputer port source (Computer1 and Computer2 ports)
Selecting an Image Source 71
CUSB port source
DNetwork source (LAN and Screen Mirroring)
• Press the [Home] button on the remote control.
Then select the source you want to use from the screen displayed.
a• The display order of the input sources changes when the
projector detects an input signal. (The detected input source
appears in the upper left position.)
• You can fix the display order of the input sources using the
Sort Source Thumbnails setting in the projector's Display
menu.
• A check mark appears on the image from the current input
source. You can check a preview of the current input image
for most sources as a thumbnail (other than the USB input
source in Content Playback mode).
• If there are more than nine available input sources, your
desired source may appear on the next page. Select the right
arrow to move to the next page.
Image Aspect Ratio 72
The projector can display images in different width-to-height ratios called
aspect ratios. Normally, the input signal from your video source determines
the image's aspect ratio. However, you can change the aspect ratio for certain
images to fit your screen.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Image Aspect Ratio" p.72
• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.72
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the aspect ratio of the displayed image.
a• Set the Screen Type setting in the projector's Installation menu
before changing the aspect ratio.
• Available only when using one of the following input sources:
• Computer
• HDMI
• HDBaseT
• Available only when the Scale setting is turned off or the Scale Mode
setting is set to Full Display.
sImage >Scale >Scale Mode
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Aspect] button on the remote control.
The shape and size of the displayed image changes, and the name of the
aspect ratio appears briefly on the screen.
cTo cycle through the available aspect ratios for your input signal, press
the [Aspect] button repeatedly.
a• The available aspect ratio setting varies depending on the input
signal.
• To display images without black bars, set Resolution to Wide or
Normal in the projector’s Image menu according to the computer’s
resolution.
• If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected
screen frame, you can adjust the position of the image using the
Screen Position setting in the projector's Installation menu.
sInstallation >Screen Type >Screen Position
Available Image Aspect Ratios
You can select the following image aspect ratios, depending on the selected
Screen Type setting and the input signal from your image source.
a• Note that using the aspect ratio function of the projector to reduce,
enlarge, or split the projected image for commercial purposes or for
public viewing may infringe upon the rights of the copyright holder
of that image based on copyright law.
Aspect mode Description
Auto Automatically sets the aspect ratio according to the
input signal and the Resolution setting.
Full Displays images using the full size of the projection
area, but does not maintain the aspect ratio.
Image Aspect Ratio 73
Aspect mode Description
H-Zoom
V-Zoom
(Available when Screen
Type is set to 4:3,16:9 or
16:10)
Displays images using the full width (H-Zoom) or full
height (V-Zoom) of the projection area and maintains
the aspect ratio of the image. Areas that exceed the
edges of the projected screen are not projected.
Native
(Available when Screen
Type is set to 4:3,16:9 or
16:10)
Displays images as is (aspect ratio and resolution are
maintained). Areas that exceed the edges of the
projected screen are not projected.
Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode) 74
The projector offers different color modes to provide optimum brightness,
contrast, and color for a variety of viewing environments and image types.
You can select the mode designed to match your image and environment, or
experiment with the available modes.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Color Mode" p.74
• "Available Color Modes" p.74
Changing the Color Mode
You can change the projector's Color Mode using the remote control to
optimize the image for your viewing environment.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to change the
Color Mode.
The name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen and then
image appearance changes.
cTo cycle through all of the available color modes for your input signal,
press the [Color Mode] button repeatedly.
aYou can also set the Color Mode setting in the projector's Image
menu.
Available Color Modes
You can set the projector to use these color modes, depending on the input
source you are using:
Color mode Description
Dynamic This is the brightest mode. Best for prioritizing
brightness.
Presentation Best for projecting vivid images.
Cinema Best for enjoying content such as movies.
sRGB Best for faithfully reproducing the color of the source
image.
DICOM SIM Best for projecting X-ray photographs and other
medical images. This mode is for reference purposes
only and should not be used to make medical
diagnoses.
Multi-Projection Best for projecting from multiple projectors (reduces
the color tone difference between images).
Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment 75
You can turn on Dynamic Contrast to automatically optimize the image
luminance. This improves the image contrast based on the brightness of the
content you project.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Dynamic Contrast and press [Enter].
eChoose one of the following options and press [Enter]:
•Normal for standard brightness adjustment.
•High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.
fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Image Color 76
You can fine-tune various aspects of how colors are displayed in your
projected images.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness" p.76
• "Adjusting the Gamma" p.77
Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness
You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness settings for individual
image colors.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].
dSelect RGBCMY and press [Enter].
eSelect the color to adjust, and press [Enter].
fDo the following as necessary for each setting:
• To adjust the overall hue of the color, bluish - greenish - reddish,
adjust the Hue setting.
• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation
setting.
• To adjust the overall color brightness of the color, adjust the
Brightness setting.
gPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Image Color 77
Adjusting the Gamma
You can correct differences in projected image colors that occur between
different image sources by adjusting the Gamma setting.
aTo optimize the color tone according to the scene, and to obtain a
more vivid image, correct the image by adjusting the Scene Adaptive
Gamma setting.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Gamma and press [Enter].
eSelect and adjust the correction value.
When you select a smaller value, you can reduce the overall brightness
of the image to make the image sharper. When you select a larger value,
the dark areas of images become brighter, but the color saturation for
lighter areas may become weaker.
Adjusting the Image Color 78
a• If you set the Color Mode setting to DICOM SIM in the
projector's Image menu, select the adjustment value according
to the projection size.
• If the projection size is 120 inches or less, select a small
value.
• If the projection size is 120 inches or more, select a large
value.
• Medical images may not be reproduced correctly depending on
your settings and screen specifications.
fIf you want to make finer adjustments, select Custom and press
[Enter].
gPress the left or right arrow buttons to select the color tone you want to
adjust on the gamma adjustment graph. Then press the up or down
arrow button to adjust the value and press [Enter].
hPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Image Resolution 79
You can adjust the resolution of the image to reproduce a clear image with an
emphatic texture and material feel.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Image Enhancement and press [Enter].
eSelect Image Preset Mode and press [Enter].
fSelect the preset option and press [Enter].
The following settings saved in the preset option are applied to the
image.
Adjusting the Image Resolution 80
•Noise Reduction
•MPEG Noise Reduction
•Deinterlacing
•Super-resolution
•Detail Enhancement
gAdjust each setting in the projector's Image menu individually as
necessary.
• To reduce flickering in images, adjust the Noise Reduction setting.
• To reduce the noise or artifacts seen in MPEG video, adjust the
MPEG Noise Reduction setting.
• To convert interlaced-to-progressive signals for certain video image
types, adjust the Deinterlacing setting.
•Off: for fast-moving video images.
•Video: for most video images.
•Film/Auto: for movies, computer graphics, and animation.
aSetting is only displayed when the current signal is interlaced
signal (480i/576i/1080i).
• To reduce blurring appeared when projecting low resolution image,
adjust the Super-resolution setting.
• To create a more emphatic texture and material feel of the image,
adjust the Detail Enhancement setting.
aThe settings value in the preset option are overwritten.
hPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Brightness 81
You can adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.
aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Operation menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Light Source Brightness Control and press [Enter].
eIf you want to maintain the brightness at a specific level, select the
Maintain Brightness setting and select On.
fIf you turn on Maintain Brightness, select the Maintain Brightness
Level setting and check the Estimated Remains information.
gIf you turn off Maintain Brightness, select the Light Source Mode
setting:
•Normal lets you set the brightness to the maximum level. This makes
the light source operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
•Quiet lets you set the brightness to 70% and reduces fan noise. This
makes the light source operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
•Extended lets you set the brightness to 70% and extends the life
expectancy of the light source. This makes the light source operation
time approximately 30,000 hours.
Adjusting the Brightness 82
•Custom lets you to select a custom brightness level between 70 to
100%.
hIf you set the Light Source Mode setting to Custom, select Brightness
Level and use the left and right arrow buttons to select the brightness.
iPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
aFor the best results in maintaining a constant brightness, set the Light
Source Calibration setting to Run Periodically in the projector's
Management menu.
gg Related Links
• "Constant Brightness Usage Hours" p.82
• "Light Source Operation Time" p.83
• "Projector Specifications" p.254
Constant Brightness Usage Hours
If you turn on Maintain Brightness, the number of hours the projector can
maintain constant brightness is displayed as Estimated Remains.
Display level Estimated remaining hours
10000 or more hours
8000 to 9999 hours
6000 to 7999 hours
4000 to 5999 hours
Adjusting the Brightness 83
Display level Estimated remaining hours
2000 to 3999 hours
0 to 1999 hours
aThe number of hours displayed as Estimated Remains is just a guide.
Light Source Operation Time
The light source operation time varies depending on the Brightness Level
setting and whether Maintain Brightness is on or off.
a• The light source operation time varies depending on the
environmental conditions and usage.
• The hours listed here are an approximate and are not guaranteed.
• You may need to replace internal parts sooner than the estimated
light source operation time.
• If Maintain Brightness is turned on, and you have exceeded the
usage hours listed here, you may not be able to select a high
Maintain Brightness Level setting.
Maintain Brightness off
Brightness Level setting Time before the brightness of the light source is
reduced by half (approximate)
100% 20,000 hours
90% 21,000 hours
80% 24,000 hours
70% 30,000 hours
Maintain Brightness on
AMaintain brightness level
BTime the projector can maintain constant brightness (approximate)
Maintain Brightness Level
setting
Hours
85% 6,000 hours
80% 10,000 hours
75% 14,000 hours
70% 19,000 hours
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons 84
The volume buttons control the projector's internal speaker system.
You can also control the volume of any external speakers you connected to
the projector.
You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.
aTurn on the projector and start a presentation.
bTo lower or raise the volume, press the [Volume] buttons on the
remote control as shown.
A volume gauge appears on the screen.
cTo set the volume to a specific level for an input source, select Volume
in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
Caution
Do not start a presentation at a high volume setting. Sudden loud noises may cause
hearing loss.
Always lower the volume before powering off, so that you can power on and then
gradually increase the volume.
Adjusting Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's adjustment features.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.86
• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.89
• "Projecting in Content Playback Mode" p.94
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.101
• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.102
• "Zooming Images (E-Zoom)" p.103
• "Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)" p.104
• "Saving a User's Logo Image" p.106
• "Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings" p.108
• "Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features" p.109
• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.112
• "Projector Security Features" p.124
Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 86
You can use the split screen feature to simultaneously project two or four
images from different image sources.
a• While using the split screen feature, other projector features may not
be available and some settings may be automatically applied to all
images.
• You cannot perform split screen projection when the Content
Playback setting is set to On in the projector's Operation menu.
• You may not be able to perform split screen projection when you use
the Scale feature or the Edge Blending feature in the projector's
Multi-Projection menu.
aPress the [Split] button on the remote control.
bSelect 2 Screens or 4 Screens.
When splitting screen into halves, the currently selected input source
moves to the left of the screen.
When you have split screen into quarters previously, the input sources
of the previous split screen projection are selected and are projected at
the same position.
cPress the [Menu] button.
Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 87
dWhen splitting screen into halves, do the following as necessary:
ASelect the input source.
aYou can only select input sources that can be
combined.
BSelect the screen from which you want to hear audio.
CSelect the screen size.
eWhen splitting screen into quarters, do the following as necessary:
ASelect the input source.
aYou can only select input sources that can be
combined.
BSelect the screen from which you want to hear audio.
fSelect Execute and press [Enter].
gTo exit the split screen feature, press [Split] or [Esc].
gg Related Links
• "Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection" p.88
• "Split Screen Projection Restrictions" p.88
Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 88
Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split
Screen Projection
These input source combinations cannot be projected simultaneously.
• HDMI2 and HDBaseT
• Computer1 and Computer2
• USB and LAN
aWhen you split the screen into quarters and select the USB and the
Screen Mirroring input source at the same time, you can select only
one Screen Mirroring source.
Split Screen Projection Restrictions
Operating restrictions
The following operations cannot be performed during split screen projection.
• Setting the projector's menu
• E-Zoom
• Switching the aspect mode (the aspect mode is set to Auto)
• Operations using the [User] button on the remote control, other than
displaying the network information on the projected surface.
• Applying the Dynamic Contrast setting
• Applying the Image Shift setting
• Displaying the network information on the projected surface by a method
other than pressing the [User] button.
• Displaying the Screen Mirroring information bar
Image restrictions
• Even if you set No-signal Screen to Logo in the projector's Display menu,
the blue screen appears when no image signal is being input.
• When you create a single unified image projected from multiple projectors
and use the split screen feature, the second projector does not detect an
image signal.
gg Related Links
• "Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)" p.104
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.72
• "Zooming Images (E-Zoom)" p.103
• "Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment" p.75
• "Adjusting the Menu Settings" p.177
Projecting a PC Free Presentation 89
You can use your projector's PC Free feature whenever you connect a USB
device that contains compatible presentation files. This lets you quickly and
easily display a presentation and control it using the projector's remote
control.
gg Related Links
• "Supported PC Free File Types" p.89
• "Precautions on PC Free Projection" p.90
• "Starting a PC Free Slide Show" p.90
• "Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation" p.92
• "PC Free Display Options" p.93
Supported PC Free File Types
You can project these types of files using the projector's PC Free feature.
a• For best results, place your files on media that is formatted in
FAT16/32.
• If you have trouble projecting from media formatted for non-
Windows file systems, try formatting the media for Windows
instead.
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Image .jpg Make sure the file is not:
• CMYK format
• Progressive format
• Highly compressed
• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution
.bmp Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
.gif Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
• Animated
• Interlaced
.webp Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1920 × 1200 resolution
• Interlaced
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Movie .avi
(Motion
JPEG)
• Version: AVI 1.0 only
• Resolution: 1280 × 720 or less
• Size: 2 GB or less
• Movie Codec: Motion JPEG
• Frame Rate: up to 30 fps
• Audio Codec: LPCM or IMA ADPCM
• Audio Sampling Rate: 11.025 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz,
24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz
Projecting a PC Free Presentation 90
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Movie .mp4/.mov
(H.264,
H265)
• Resolution: 1920 × 1200 or less
• Size: 2 GB or less
• Movie Codec: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC or H.265/MPEG-
H HEVC
• Frame Rate: up to 30 fps
• Profile:
• H.264/MPEG-4 AVC: Baseline Profile, Main Profile,
High Profile
• H.265/MPEG-H HEVC: Main Profile
• Color Format: YUV420
• Single slice structure
• Audio Codec: MPEG-2 AAC-LC, MPEG-4 AAC-LC,
or LPCM
• Audio Channel: up to 2ch (channel 2)
• Audio Bit: 8 bits or 16 bits
• Audio Sampling Rate:
• MPEG-2 AAC-LC: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• MPEG-4 AAC-LC: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• LPCM: 11.025 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz
Precautions on PC Free Projection
Note the following precautions when using PC Free features.
• You cannot use a USB key for PC Free features.
• Do not disconnect the USB storage device while it is being accessed;
otherwise, PC Free may not operate correctly.
• You may not be able to use the security features on certain USB storage
devices with PC Free features.
• When connecting a USB device that includes an AC adapter, connect the
AC adapter to an electrical outlet when you use the device with your
projector.
• Some commercially available USB card readers may not be compatible with
the projector.
• The projector can recognize up to 5 cards inserted into the connected card
reader at one time.
• You can use the following functions while projecting in PC Free.
• Freeze
• A/V Mute
• E-Zoom
gg Related Links
• "Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom)" p.104
• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.102
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.101
• "Zooming Images (E-Zoom)" p.103
Starting a PC Free Slide Show
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB
input source and start your slide show.
a• You can change the PC Free operation options or add special effects
by highlighting Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing
[Enter].
Projecting a PC Free Presentation 91
aPress the [USB] button on the remote control until the PC Free file list
screen appears.
a• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons
to select the drive and press [Enter].
• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select
Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].
bDo one of the following to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press
the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to
Top and press [Enter].
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous
Page and press [Enter].
cDo one of the following:
• To display an individual image, press the arrow buttons to highlight
the image and press [Enter]. (Press the [Esc] button to return to the
file list screen.)
• To display a slide show of all the images in a folder, press the arrow
buttons to highlight the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen
and press [Enter].
a• You can change the image switching time by highlighting
Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].
• If any file names are longer than the display area or include
unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or
changed only on the screen display.
dWhile projecting, use the following commands to control the display:
• To rotate a displayed image, press the up or down arrow button.
• To move to the next or previous image, press the left or right arrow
button.
eTo stop the display, follow the on-screen instructions or press the [Esc]
button.
You return to the file list screen.
Projecting a PC Free Presentation 92
fTurn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device
from the projector.
gg Related Links
• "PC Free Display Options" p.93
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.32
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB
input source and start your movie.
a• You can change the PC Free operation options by highlighting
Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].
aPress the [USB] button on the remote control until the PC Free file list
screen appears.
a• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons
to select the drive and press [Enter].
• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select
Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].
bDo one of the following to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press
the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to
Top and press [Enter].
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous
Page and press [Enter].
cTo play back a movie, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and
press [Enter].
a• If any file names are longer than the display area or include
unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or
changed only on the screen display.
• If you want to play back all the movies in a folder in sequence,
select the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen.
dTo stop movie playback, press the [Esc] button, highlight Exit, and
press [Enter].
You return to the file list screen.
eTurn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device
from the projector.
gg Related Links
• "PC Free Display Options" p.93
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.32
Projecting a PC Free Presentation 93
PC Free Display Options
You can select these display options when using PC Free. To access this
screen, highlight Option at the bottom of the PC Free file list screen and press
[Enter].
Setting Options Description
Display Order Name Order Displays files in name order
Date Order Displays files in date order
Sort Order In Ascending Sorts files in first-to-last order
In Descending Sorts files in last-to-first order
Continuous Play On Displays a slide show continuously
Off Displays a slide show once
Screen Switching
Time
No Does not display the next file
automatically
1 Second to 60 Seconds Displays files for the selected time
and switches to the next file
automatically; high resolution images
may switch at a slightly slower rate
Setting Options Description
Effect No No effect
Wipe Transitions between images using a
wipe effect
Dissolve Transitions between images using a
dissolve effect
Random Transitions between images using a
random variety of effects
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 94
Your projector's Content Playback feature allows you to project your digital
signage content. You can easily project playlists that contain images and
movies saved on an external storage device. You can also add color and shape
effects to your projected image.
gg Related Links
• "Supported Content Playback Mode File Types" p.94
• "Switching to Content Playback Mode" p.95
• "Projecting Your Playlists" p.96
• "Adding Effects to Your Projected Image" p.98
• "Content Playback Mode Restrictions" p.100
Supported Content Playback Mode File Types
You can project these types of files using the projector's Content Playback
feature.
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Image .jpg Make sure the file is not:
• Progressive format
• Highly compressed
• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution
.bmp Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
.gif Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
• Animated
• Interlaced
.webp Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
• Interlaced
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 95
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Movie .avi
(Motion
JPEG)
• Version: AVI 1.0 only
• Resolution: 1280 × 800 or less
• Size: 2 GB or less
• Movie Codec: Motion JPEG
• Audio Codec: LPCM or IMA ADPCM
• Audio Sampling Rate: 11.025 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 44.1
kHz, 16 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, or 48 kHz
.mp4/.mov
(H.264/H.2
65)
• Resolution: 1920 × 1200 or less
• Size: 2 GB or less
• Movie Codec: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC or H.265/MPEG-
H HEVC
• Profile:
• H.264/MPEG-4 AVC: Baseline Profile, Main Profile,
High Profile
• H.265/MPEG-H HEVC: Main Profile
• Color Format: YUV420
• Audio Codec: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, or LPCM
• Audio Sampling Rate:
• MPEG-2 AAC-LC: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• MPEG-4 AAC-LC: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• LPCM: 11.025 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz
Switching to Content Playback Mode
Before you project your playlists, you need to switch to Content Playback
mode.
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Operation menu, and then press
[Enter].
cSelect the Content Playback setting and set it to On.
You see a confirmation prompt.
dTurn off the projector, then turn it on again to enable Content Playback
mode.
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 96
Projecting Your Playlists
You can project playlists that contain images and movies in Content Playback
mode.
aCreate your playlists and export them to a USB flash drive using one of
the following methods:
• The Epson Projector Content Manager software lets you create
playlists and save them on an external storage device. You can also
add color and shape effects to your projected image, and schedule
playlists.
You can download and install Epson Projector Content Manager
from the following Web site.
epson.sn
See the Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide for
instructions.
• Epson Web Control allows you to create playlists using a Web
browser and save them to an external storage device connected to a
projector on a network. You can also add color and shape effects to
your projected image.
• The Epson Creative Projection app lets you create content on iOS
devices. You can also transfer content to the projector wirelessly.
You can download Epson Creative Projection from the App Store.
Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store are the
responsibility of the customer.
bIn Content Playback mode, connect the USB flash drive into the
projector's USB-A port.
cPress the [USB] button on the remote control.
The playlist that was played last is projected. If there is a timetable
assigned, the playlist will play back according to the schedule in the
timetable.
a• You can also hold down the [Num] and numeric buttons to project
your favorite playlist. You can set a remote control shortcut key
using the software you used to create the playlists.
• To select the target playlist from the list, select USB Viewer in the
projector's Operation menu, and use the arrow buttons.
gg Related Links
• "Creating Playlists Using Epson Web Control" p.96
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Creating Playlists Using Epson Web Control
In Content Playback mode, you can create playlists using a Web browser and
save them to a USB flash drive connected to a projector on a network.
Attention
Do not remove the USB flash drive from the projector or disconnect the projector's
power cord while creating playlists. Data saved on the USB flash drive may be
damaged.
aMake sure the projector is operating in Content Playback mode.
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 97
bMake sure your computer or device is connected to the same network
as the projector.
cMake sure a USB flash drive is connected to the projector's USB-A port.
dStart your Web browser on your computer or device.
eGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box. When entering an IPv6 address,
wrap the address with [ and ].
fSelect USB Memory Device.
gSelect Upload New Data.
hSelect the images or movies you want to add to the playlist.
aYou can upload .avi, .jpeg (.jpg), .webp, .bmp, or .gif files.
If you want to add .mp4 or .mov files to the playlist, use the
Epson Projector Content Manager software or the Epson
Creative Projection app.
The selected files are copied to the connected USB flash drive.
iDo one of the following:
• To add them to the existing playlist, select Add to Playlist and select
the playlist you want to add them to.
• To create a new playlist and add them to it, select Create New
Playlist.
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 98
jEdit the playlist.
AEdits the playlist name.
BSelects whether to enable repeat playback or not.
CRegisters the playlist to your favorites.
When a playlist has been registered as a favorite, you can start playback
quickly using the Remote screen or the remote control.
DDisplays the images or movies you have added to the playlist. The playlist
plays the images or movies in order.
EAdds images or movies to the playlist.
FDeletes images or movies from the playlist.
GOpens the Switch Image screen.
You can specify the time interval to switch to the next image file. You can
also select a transition effect.
HOpens the Effects screen.
You can add predefined color and shape effect filters to a playlist. You
can also create a customized effect.
IPreviews the playlist.
kWhen you have finished editing the playlist, select Finish.
a• You can play the playlist from the Remote or Playlist screen.
• When you want to specify when the playlist starts and finishes,
schedule the playlist using the Epson Projector Content Manager
software.
gg Related Links
• "Web Control Options" p.158
Adding Effects to Your Projected Image
You can add color and shape effects to the projected image in Content
Playback mode.
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 99
a• To use the effect functions, make sure you perform Refresh Mode
regularly.
sManagement >Refresh Mode
• This feature is not available when using the Edge Blending feature.
aIn Content Playback mode, press the [Menu] button, select the
Operation menu, and then press [Enter].
bSelect Overlay Effect and press [Enter].
cSelect On as the Overlay Effect setting and press [Enter].
dSelect Shape Filter and press [Enter].
eAdjust each of the following options as necessary:
•Shape to select the shape effect you want from circles, rectangles, or
customized shapes.
aYou can add your images as customized shapes using the
Epson Projector Content Manager software. See the Epson
Projector Content Manager Operation Guide for details.
•Filter Effect to select whether to mask inside or outside of the
selected shape.
•Size to set the shape size.
•Position to set the shape position.
aWhen you use a customized shape, you cannot change the Size
and Position settings.
fSelect Color Filter and press [Enter].
gAdjust each of the following options as necessary:
•Color Filter to select the color.
Projecting in Content Playback Mode 100
•Custom to set a customized color by adjusting Red,Green, and Blue
individually.
hSelect Lightness to set the brightness level.
iWhen you are finished, press [Menu] to exit the menus.
Content Playback Mode Restrictions
Operating restrictions
The following operations cannot be performed in Content Playback mode.
• Changing the Color Temp. setting in the Image menu (when Warm White
or Cool White is selected as Color Filter)
• Split Screen
• Log Save Destination
• Blanking
• Changing the Screen Type setting in the Installation menu
• Changing the No-signal Screen setting in the Display menu
• Detecting the input signal automatically
• Changing Remote Password in the Network Settings menu
• PC Free
• USB Document camera
• Screen delivery function using the Epson iProjection software
• Changing the Connection Guide Display setting in the Network Settings
menu
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.196
• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.86
• "Setting the Screen Type" p.50
• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.89
Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily 101
You can temporarily turn off the projected image and sound.
This is effective when you want to redirect your audience's attention during a
presentation.
Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume
projection at the point that you stopped it.
aPress the [A/V Mute] button on the control panel or remote control.
The light source turns off and the projected image and sound are
interrupted.
bTo turn the image and sound back on, press [A/V Mute] again.
a• The projector's power automatically turns off 30 minutes after A/V
Mute is enabled. You can disable this feature.
sOperation >A/V Mute Timer
• If you selected A/V Mute as the Release A/V Mute setting in the
Operation menu, you can still control the projector while A/V Mute
is enabled.
Stopping Video Action Temporarily 102
You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and
keep the current image on the screen. Any sound or video action continues to
run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the point that you stopped
it.
aPress the [Freeze] button on the remote control to stop the video
action.
bTo restart the video action in progress, press [Freeze] again.
Zooming Images (E-Zoom) 103
You can draw attention to parts of a presentation by zooming into a portion
of the image and enlarging it on the screen
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
aThis feature is unavailable if the Scale setting in the projector's Image
menu is enabled.
aPress the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control.
You see a crosshair on the screen indicating the center of the zoom
area.
bUse the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed
image:
• Use the arrow buttons to position the crosshair in the image area you
want to zoom into. To move the crosshair diagonally, press any pair
of adjacent arrow buttons at the same time.
• Press the [E-Zoom] + button repeatedly to zoom into the image area.
Press and hold the [E-Zoom] + button to zoom in more quickly.
• To pan around the zoomed image area, use the arrow buttons.
• To zoom out of the image, press the [E-Zoom] – button.
• To return to the original image size, press [Esc].
The enlarged image is projected and the enlargement ratio is displayed
on the screen.
You can enlarge the selected area to between one to four times in 25
incremental steps.
When projecting images from an Epson document camera using a USB
connection, you can enlarge the selected area from one to eight times
its size in 57 incremental steps.
Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom) 104
You can zoom in or zoom out of the projected image using the [E-Zoom]
button on the remote control (EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
aThis feature is unavailable if the Scale setting in the projector's Image
menu is enabled.
gg Related Links
• "Zooming Into Images" p.104
• "Zooming Out of Images" p.104
Zooming Into Images
aPress the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control.
The projected image is enlarged focusing around the center of the
image. You can enlarge the image between one to four times in 25
incremental steps.
bUse the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed
image:
• Press the [E-Zoom] + button repeatedly to zoom into the image.
• To pan around the zoomed image, use the arrow buttons.
• To zoom out of the image, press the [E-Zoom] – button.
• To return to the original image size, press the [Default] button.
a• You can also use the [E-Zoom] + and - buttons of the document
camera that you project image from.
• You can also set the E-Zoom setting in the projector's Installation
menu.
Zooming Out of Images
aPress the [E-Zoom] - button on the remote control.
The projected image is reduced. You can reduce the image between
100% to 50% in incremental steps.
bUse the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed-
out image:
• Press the [E-Zoom] - button repeatedly to zoom out of the projected
image.
Zooming In/Zooming Out of Images (E-Zoom) 105
• To move the zoomed-out image in the projection area, use the arrow
buttons.
• To zoom into the image, press the [E-Zoom] + button.
• To return to the original image size, press the [Default] button.
a• You can also use the [E-Zoom] + and - buttons of the document
camera that you project image from.
• You can also set the E-Zoom setting in the projector's Installation
menu.
Saving a User's Logo Image 106
You can save an image on the projector and display it whenever the projector
turns on. You can also display the image when the projector is not receiving
an input signal. This image is called the user's logo screen.
You can select a photo, graphic, or company logo as the user's logo, which is
useful in identifying the projector's owner to help deter theft. You can prevent
changes to the user's logo by setting up password protection.
a• If you turned on Menu Protection for the User's Logo setting, set it
to Off before performing the steps here to save the user's logo.
• When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another
using the batch setup feature, user's logo is also copied. Do not
register the information that you do not want to share between
multiple projectors as a user's logo.
• You cannot save content that is protected by HDCP.
• When Content Playback is set to On, you can display the user's logo
only when the projector starts up.
aDisplay the image you want to project as the user's logo.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
cSelect User's Logo >Start Setting and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a
user's logo.
aAdjustments such as Geometry Correction, E-Zoom, Aspect,
Scale, or Screen Type are temporarily canceled when you select
User's Logo.
dSelect Yes and press [Enter].
aDepending on the current image signal, the screen size may
change to match the resolution of the image signal.
Saving a User's Logo Image 107
eCheck the displayed image, and then select Yes to save it as the user's
logo.
The user's logo is overwritten and a completion message is displayed.
fPress [Esc] to exit the message screen.
gSelect the Display menu and press [Enter].
hSelect when you want to display the User's Logo screen:
• To display it whenever there is no input signal, select No-signal
Screen and set it to Logo.
• To display it whenever you turn the projector on, select Startup
Screen and set it to On.
aTo prevent changes to the User's Logo settings, turn on Menu
Protection for the User's Logo setting and set the password.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.125
Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings 108
You can save customized settings and then select the saved settings whenever
you want to use them.
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Memory menu, and press [Enter].
cSelect one of the following options:
•Save Memory lets you save your current settings to memory (10
memories with different names are available).
a• You can save the following settings:
•Image menu settings for each color mode
•Video Range and Overscan in the Signal I/O menu
•Light Source Mode and Brightness Level in the
Operation menu
•Color Matching in the Multi-Projection menu
• A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a
blue mark. Saving over a previously saved memory
overwrites the settings with your current settings.
•Load Memory lets you overwrite your current settings with saved
settings.
•Rename Memory lets you rename a saved memory.
•Erase Memory lets you erase the selected memory settings.
dPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
a• The saved Color Mode is displayed on the right of the memory
name.
• To delete all saved memories, select Reset Memory Settings.
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.203
Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features 109
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's advanced
image adjustments.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Color Tone (Color Uniformity)" p.109
• "Running Light Source Calibration" p.110
Adjusting the Color Tone (Color Uniformity)
You can use the Color Uniformity feature to manually adjust the color tone
balance in the projected image.
aThe color tone may not be uniform even after adjusting the color
uniformity.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Color Uniformity and press [Enter].
cSelect Color Uniformity again and press [Enter].
dSelect On and press [Enter]. Then press [Esc].
eSelect Adjustment Level and press [Enter].
fSelect the first adjustment level you want to adjust and press [Esc].
Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features 110
aThere are eight adjustment levels, from white to gray to black.
You can adjust each level individually.
gSelect Start Adjustments and press [Enter].
hSelect the area of the image you want to adjust and press [Enter].
aAdjust each area individually, then select All and adjust the
entire screen.
iSelect Red,Green, or Blue and adjust the color tone, if necessary.
aThe adjustment screen changes each time you press [Enter].
jPress [Esc] to return to the area selection screen.
kRepeat the color adjustments to each area.
lReturn to step 5 and repeat all steps to adjust other levels.
mWhen you are finished, press [Menu] to exit.
Running Light Source Calibration
Light source calibration automatically adjusts any difference between the
white balance and the brightness level of the light source. You should perform
light source calibration every 100 hours of projector usage. You can also
schedule automatic calibration or run the light source calibration manually
using the menus.
Automatic light source calibration may not start in the following conditions:
• Within 20 minutes of turning on the projector.
• When using direct shutdown.
• When you have used the projector continuously for over 24 hours.
• When the projector brightness is automatically dimmed due to high
temperatures.
Using Advanced Image Adjustment Features 111
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Light Source Calibration and press [Enter].
cSelect any of the following:
• To run the light source calibration now, select Run Now.
• To automatically run the light source calibration every 100 hours of
projector usage, select Run Periodically.
• To schedule automatic calibration, select Schedule Settings.
• To check the last time the projector performed a calibration, see Last
Run.
aIf you use the projector continuously for more than 24 hours or
use direct shutdown regularly, select Schedule Settings to
schedule calibration of the light source periodically.
dWhen you are finished, press [Menu] to exit the menus.
gg Related Links
• "Setting Projector Event Schedules" p.174
Using Multiple Projectors 112
You can combine the projected images from two or more projectors to create
one unified image area.
gg Related Links
• "Multiple Projector Adjustment Overview" p.112
• "Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control" p.113
• "Tiling Images into One Image" p.115
• "Blending the Image Edges" p.116
• "Matching the Image Colors" p.120
• "Scaling an Image" p.121
Multiple Projector Adjustment Overview
The following steps provide an overview of image adjustment for multiple
projectors. You can correct the brightness and color tone of each projector's
image and create a seamless image from multiple projectors.
a• We recommend adjusting the image at least 20 minutes after you
start projecting, because images are not stable right after turning on
the projector.
• In some cases the brightness and color tone may not match
completely even after correction.
• If brightness and color tone differences become more noticeable over
time, repeat the adjustments.
• When installing the projectors, make sure hot air from the exhaust
vent of one projector does not go into the air intake vent of another
projector.
aSet IDs for all the remote controls and projectors.
bAdjust each projector's physical position and angle to the screen.
cSelect Multi-Projection as the Color Mode setting in the projector's
Image menu on each projector.
dAdjust the arrangement of the images (tiling).
eAdjust the image aspect ratio for each projector.
fAdjust the position of the image for each projector using lens shift
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
gAdjust the zoom and focus for each projector.
hAdjust small differences in the images using the Point Correction
setting.
iAdjust the edges of the images using the Edge Blending and Black
Level settings.
jAdjust the brightness and tint of the images using the Color Matching
setting.
Using Multiple Projectors 113
kCrop and combine each projector's image area using the Scale setting.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.74
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.72
• "Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring" p.69
• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.63
• "Precautions on Installation" p.24
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Lens Shift" p.53
• "Resizing the Image with the Zoom Ring" p.66
• "Reducing the Image Using Digital Zoom" p.67
Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector
Control
When lining up multiple projectors to project images, you can correct the
brightness and color tone of each projector's image so that the images match
closely.
You can set a unique projector ID for each projector to operate them
individually using a remote control, and then correct the brightness and color
for each projector.
gg Related Links
• "Setting the Projector ID" p.113
• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.114
Setting the Projector ID
To control multiple projectors from a remote control, give each projector a
unique ID.
aTo control more than nine projectors, use the Epson Projector
Professional Tool.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Projector ID and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors 114
cUse the arrow buttons to select the identification number you want to
use for the projector. Then press [Enter].
dPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
eRepeat these steps for all the other projectors you want to operate from
one remote control.
Selecting the Projector You want to Operate
After setting the projector's ID, select the ID for the projector you want to
operate using the remote control.
aAim the remote control at the target projector and press the [ID]
button.
The current Projector ID is displayed on the projected screen. It
disappears after about 3 seconds.
bWhile holding the [ID] button, press the number button that matches
the ID of the projector you want to operate.
The projector you want to operate is selected.
Using Multiple Projectors 115
a• When you select [0/All] on the remote control, you can
operate all projectors regardless the Projector ID setting.
• When you set the Projector ID setting to Off, you can operate
the projector using the remote control whichever ID you select
on the remote control.
• The projector ID setting is saved in the remote control. Even if
the remote control batteries are removed to replace them and
so on, the saved ID setting is retained. However, if the batteries
are left out of the remote control for an extended period, the
ID returns to its default setting (0/All).
• When you use multiple remote controls at the same time, you
may not be able to operate projectors as intended due to
infrared interference.
Tiling Images into One Image
You can project the same image from up to 15 projectors to create one large
image using the Tiling feature.
aBefore tiling, make sure the displayed images from your projectors are
rectangular, correctly sized, and focused.
gg Related Links
• "Configuring Tiling" p.115
Configuring Tiling
You can configure tiling manually.
aAvailable only when the HDMI Out Setting is set to Off
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors 116
cSelect Tiling >Layout and press [Enter].
dSelect the number of rows and columns you are setting up as the Row
and Column settings. Then select Set and press [Enter].
eRepeat the previous steps with each projector you are setting up before
continuing with the next step.
fSelect Location Setup and press [Enter].
gSelect the position of each projected image as follows:
•Row Order to layout the screens from top to bottom in sequential
order, starting with 1at the top
•Column Order to layout the screens from left to right, starting with
Aon the left
Select Set and press [Enter].
hRepeat the previous step with each projector you are setting up before
continuing with the next step.
iSelect the input signal to display an image.
After performing the steps here, adjust the images for any gaps and
differences in color.
Blending the Image Edges
You can use the projector's Edge Blending feature to create a seamless image
from multiple projectors.
Using Multiple Projectors 117
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Edge Blending and press [Enter].
cTurn on the Edge Blending,Line Guide, and Pattern Guide settings.
aSelect the different Guide Color setting for each projector so that
you can see the blended area clearly.
dSelect the edge you want to blend on each projector and press [Enter].
You see a screen like this:
eSelect the Blending setting and select On.
fSelect the Blend Start Position setting and adjust the blending start
position
aIf you created a unified image area using the edge blending
feature, set the Blend Start Position setting of the blended edge
to 0.
gSelect the Blend Range setting and use the arrow buttons to select the
width of the blended area so that the displayed guides are at the edges
of the overlapping area between the two images.
hPress [Esc] to return to the previous screen.
Using Multiple Projectors 118
iSelect the Blend Curve setting and select a gradient for the shaded area
on the projectors.
jWhen the edges are blended, turn off the Line Guide and Pattern
Guide settings on each projector to check the final settings.
kWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
aIf the blended area does not overlap exactly, correct the shape of the
blended area using Point Correction.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Black Level" p.118
• "Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area" p.120
Adjusting the Black Level
You can adjust the brightness and color tone of the areas where the images do
not overlap to create a seamless image.
a• You cannot adjust the Black Level setting when a test pattern is
displayed.
• If the Geometry Correction value is very large, you may not be able
to adjust the Black Level correctly.
• The brightness and tone may differ in areas where the images overlap
as well as in other areas even after performing the Black Level
adjustment.
• If you change the Edge Blending setting, the Black Level setting
returns to its default value.
• Available only when at least one of Top Edge,Bottom Edge,Left
Edge, and Right Edge are set to On in the Edge Blending settings.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Black Level and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors 119
cSelect Color Adjustment and press [Enter].
The adjustment areas are displayed based on the Edge Blending setting.
dUse the arrow buttons to select the area you want to adjust and press
[Enter].
The selected area is displayed in orange.
aWhen multiple screens are overlapping, adjust based on the area
with the most overlap (the brightest area). In the illustration
below, first align (2) with (1), and then adjust so that (3) aligns
with (2).
eAdjust the black tone.
You can use the Brightness buttons to adjust the RGB values at the
same time.
fRepeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to adjust any remaining screen areas.
gWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
Using Multiple Projectors 120
Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area
If there are areas where the color does not match after adjusting the Black
Level setting, you can adjust them individually.
aSelect Area Correction in the Black Level setting and press [Enter].
bSelect Start Adjustments and press [Enter].
Boundary lines indicating where images overlap are displayed. The lines
are displayed based on the Edge Blending setting.
cUse the arrow buttons to select the boundary line you want to adjust.
Then press [Enter].
The selected line is displayed in orange.
dUse the arrow buttons to adjust the line position. Then press [Enter].
eUse the arrow buttons to select the point you want to move. Then press
[Enter].
The selected point is displayed in orange.
aYou can change the number of the displayed points using the
Points setting.
fUse the arrow buttons to move the point.
gTo continue to move another point, press [Esc] and then repeat steps 5
and 6.
hTo adjust another boundary line, press [Esc] until the screen shown in
step 3 is displayed.
iWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
Matching the Image Colors
You can match the display quality of multiple projectors that will project next
to each other.
Before you begin, turn on all the projectors so you can select image quality
settings that match on the unified screen.
Using Multiple Projectors 121
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Color Matching and press [Enter].
cSet the Adjustment Level to 8.
dSelect Brightness and adjust the value.
eSelect Red,Green, or Blue and adjust the color tone, if necessary.
fGo back to the top level menu and select the Operation menu and
press [Enter].
gSelect Light Source Brightness Control and press [Enter].
hSet the Light Source Mode to Custom.
iAdjust the Brightness Level.
jRepeat steps 1 through 5 multiple times, each time selecting to adjust
levels 7through 2in the same way.
kWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
Scaling an Image
You can project the same image from multiple projectors and use the Scale
feature to crop and combine them into one unified image area.
Using Multiple Projectors 122
aInput the image signal to display the image.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press
[Enter].
cSelect Scale and press [Enter].
You see this screen:
dChoose one of the following options and press [Enter]:
•Auto to set the clip position automatically depending on the HDMI
Out Setting and Edge Blending settings.
•Manual to adjust clip ranges and position manually.
eSelect the Scale Mode setting and select one of these options:
•Zoom Display to maintain the image aspect ratio as you scale the
image.
•Full Display to adjust the image to the projector's screen size as you
scale the image.
Using Multiple Projectors 123
fIf you select Manual, select one or more of the following scaling
options and adjust it as necessary:
• - or + to scale the image horizontally and vertically at the same time.
•Scale Vertically to scale the image vertically only.
•Scale Horizontally to scale the image horizontally only.
gSelect the Clip Adjustment setting and use the arrow buttons to adjust
the coordinates and size of each image as you view the screen.
hSelect Clip Range to preview the clipped area you selected.
iWhen you are finished, press [Menu].
Projector Security Features 124
You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by
setting up the following security features:
• Password security to prevent people who do not know the password from
using the projector, and prevent changes to the startup screen and other
settings.
This acts as an anti-theft function as the projector cannot be used even if it
is stolen, and you can limit who can use the projector.
• Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons
on the control panel.
This is useful at events or shows when you want to deactivate all buttons
during projection or at schools when you want to limit button operation.
• Security cabling to physically secure the projector in place.
gg Related Links
• "Password Security Types" p.124
• "Locking the Projector's Buttons" p.126
• "Locking the Remote Control Buttons" p.127
• "Installing a Security Cable" p.128
Password Security Types
You can set up the following types of password security using one shared
password:
•Power On Protection prevents anyone from using the projector without
first entering a password. When plugging the power cord and turning on
the projector at first time, you must enter the correct password. This also
applies to Direct Power On and Auto Power On.
•Menu Protection of User's Logo prevents anyone from changing the
custom screen displayed when the projector turns on or receives an input
signal. The custom screen deters theft by identifying the projector's owner.
•Menu Protection of Schedule prevents anyone from changing the
projector's schedule settings.
•Menu Protection of Network prevents anyone from changing the
projector's Network settings.
gg Related Links
• "Setting a Password" p.124
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.125
• "Entering a Password to Use the Projector" p.126
Setting a Password
To use password security, you must set a password.
aThe default password is set to "0000". Change this to your own
password.
aHold down the [Freeze] button on the remote control for about 5
seconds.
You see the Password Protection setting menu.
aIf Password Protection is already activated, you must enter the
correct password to display the Password Protection setting
menu.
Projector Security Features 125
bSelect Password and press [Enter].
You see the prompt "Change the password?".
cSelect Yes and press [Enter].
aIf you select No, the Password Protection setting menu is
displayed again.
dHold down the [Num] button on the remote control and use the
numeric buttons to set a four-digit password.
The password displays as **** as it is entered. A confirmation prompt is
displayed when you enter the fourth digit.
eEnter the password again.
You see the message "Password accepted". If you enter the password
incorrectly, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter the
password.
fPress [Esc] to return to the menu.
gMake a note of the password and keep it in a safe place.
Selecting Password Security Types
After setting a password, you see this menu, allowing you to select the
password security types you want to use.
If you do not see this menu, hold down the [Freeze] button on the remote
control for 5 seconds until the menu appears.
• To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, set the Power On Protection
setting to On.
• To prevent changes to the projector's settings, select the Menu Protection
setting, press [Enter], and select the options as necessary.
• To prevent changes to the User's Logo screen or related display settings,
set the User's Logo setting to On.
• To prevent changes to the projector's schedule settings, set the Schedule
setting to On.
• To prevent changes to projector's network settings, set the Network
setting to On.
You can attach the password protect sticker to the projector as an additional
theft deterrent.
Projector Security Features 126
aBe sure to keep the remote control in a safe place; if you lose it, you will
not be able to enter the password.
Entering a Password to Use the Projector
When the password screen is displayed, enter the correct password.
aHold down the [Num] button on the remote control while you enter
the password using the numeric buttons.
The password screen closes.
bIf the password is incorrect, you see a message and a prompt to try
again. Enter the correct password to proceed.
Attention
• If an incorrect password is entered three times in succession, the message
"The projector's operation will be locked." is displayed for approximately
5 minutes, and the projector switches to standby mode. If this happens,
disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet, reinsert it, and turn
the projector back on. The projector displays the password entry screen
again so that you can enter the correct password.
• If you have forgotten the password, make a note of the "Request Code:
xxxxx" number that appears on the screen and contact Epson for help.
• If you continue to repeat the above operation and input the wrong
password 30 times in succession, the message "The projector's operation
will be locked. Contact Epson as described in your documentation." is
displayed and the projector does not accept any more password entries.
Contact Epson for help.
Locking the Projector's Buttons
You can lock the buttons on the control panel to prevent anyone from using
the projector. The projector can still be operated using the remote control.
Projector Security Features 127
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
bSelect Control Panel Lock and press [Enter].
cSelect one of these lock types and press [Enter]:
• To lock all of the projector's buttons, select Full Lock.
• To lock all buttons except the power button, select Except for Power.
You see a confirmation prompt.
dSelect Yes and press [Enter].
The Control Panel Lock setting takes effect.
gg Related Links
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.127
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
If the projector's buttons have been locked, do one of the following to unlock
them.
• Hold down the [Enter] button on the control panel for 7 seconds. A
message is displayed and the lock is released.
• Set the Control Panel Lock setting to Off in the projector's Management
menu.
Locking the Remote Control Buttons
You can lock some of the buttons on the remote control.
To lock the remote control buttons shown here, press and hold the [Home]
button on the remote control for approximately 5 seconds.
Projector Security Features 128
To unlock the buttons, press and hold the [Home] button again for
approximately 5 seconds.
Installing a Security Cable
You can install the security cable on the projector to deter theft.
• Use the security slot on the projector to attach a Kensington Microsaver
Security system.
aFor more details on the Microsaver Security System, visit the
Kensington Web site.
https://www.kensington.com/
• Use the security cable attachment point on the projector to attach a wire
cable and secure it to a room fixture or heavy furniture.
Using the Projector on a Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.
gg Related Links
• "Wired Network Projection" p.130
• "Wireless Network Projection" p.133
• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)" p.145
• "Secure HTTP" p.150
• "Screen Sharing" p.152
Wired Network Projection 130
You can send images to your projector through a wired network. To do this,
connect the projector to your network, and then set up your projector and
computer for network projection.
After connecting and setting up the projector as described here, download
and install Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) from the following Web site.
epson.sn
Epson iProjection software sets up your computer for network projection. It
also allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting user's computer
screens over a network. See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide
(Windows/Mac) for instructions.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Wired Network" p.130
• "Selecting Wired Network Settings" p.130
Connecting to a Wired Network
To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-
TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a
Category 5 shielded cable or better.
aConnect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or
router.
bConnect the other end of the cable to the projector's LAN port.
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Before you can project from computers on your network, you need to select
network settings on the projector.
aMake sure you already connected the projector to your wired network
using the LAN port.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
cTo identify the projector over the network, select Projector Name and
enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long.
dSet the Priority Control Interface setting to Wired LAN.
Wired Network Projection 131
eSelect the Wired LAN menu and press [Enter].
fAssign the IP settings for your network as necessary.
• If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings to
set the DHCP setting to On.
• If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the
DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.
gTo prevent the IP address from being displayed on the network
information screen, set the IP Address Display setting to Off.
hSelect the Network Projection menu and press [Enter].
iTurn on the Projector Keyword setting if you want to prevent access to
the projector by anyone not in the room with it.
aWhen you turn on this setting, you must enter a displayed,
randomized keyword from a computer using Epson iProjection
to access the projector and share the current screen.
Wired Network Projection 132
jSet the Epson iProjection setting to On.
kSelect the options as necessary.
•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's
network information.
•Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password
for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.
(No password is set by default.)
•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a
projector keyword on the projected image when accessing the
projector using Epson iProjection.
lWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
mPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wired network settings complete when you see the correct IP
address on the network information screen.
gg Related Links
• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.179
Wireless Network Projection 133
You can send images to your projector through a wireless network.
• To do this, you must install the Epson wireless LAN module, and then set
up your projector and computer for wireless projection
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
• Some models have built-in wireless LAN modules
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U). You
must set up your projector and computer for wireless projection.
You can connect the projector to your wireless network by configuring the
connection manually using the projector's Network menus.
After setting up the projector, download and install the network software
from the following Web site.
epson.sn
Use the following software and documentation to set up and control wireless
projection:
• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software allows you to hold interactive
meetings by projecting the computer screens of users over a network. See
the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.
• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app allows you to project from iOS or
Android devices.
You can download Epson iProjection for free from the App Store or Google
Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or Google
Play are the responsibility of the customer.
• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) app allows you to project from
Chromebook devices.
You can download Epson iProjection from the Chrome Web Store. Any fees
incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store are the
responsibility of the customer.
gg Related Links
• "Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module" p.133
• "Installing the Wireless LAN Module" p.133
• "Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection" p.134
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually" p.135
• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode" p.139
• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Infrastructure Mode" p.139
• "Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device" p.142
• "Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer" p.142
• "Using the Wireless Presentation System to Connect Windows/Mac
Computers" p.143
Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module
This projector contains built-in wireless LAN modules
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U). Be
sure to follow these important guidelines when using a wireless LAN
connection.
Warning
• Do not use the device near medical equipment such as pace makers.
Furthermore, when using the device, make sure there is no medical equipment
such as pace makers, in the surrounding area. Electromagnetic interference may
cause medical equipment to malfunction.
• Electromagnetic interference may cause automatically controlled equipment to
malfunction which could cause an accident. Do not use the device near
automatically controlled equipment such as automatic doors or fire alarms.
Caution
Make sure you keep a distance of at least 20 cm between the device and your body.
Otherwise, it could cause you to feel unwell.
Installing the Wireless LAN Module
To use additional wireless connections
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U) and to
use the projector over a wireless network (EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U), install the
Epson wireless LAN module. Do not install any other type of wireless LAN
module.
Wireless Network Projection 134
Attention
Never remove the module while its indicator is blue or flashing, or while you are
projecting wirelessly. This could damage the module or lose data.
aThe indicator on the wireless LAN module does not operate. See the
wireless LAN indicator on the projector to check the wireless LAN
status.
aUse a cross-head screwdriver to remove the screw that secures the
wireless LAN module cover.
bConnect the wireless LAN module to the USB-A port.
cAttach the cover comes with your wireless LAN module, and secure it
in place with the screw.
Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection
Choose a connection method for connecting your computer and projector
over a network based on your network environment.
• Simple AP mode lets you directly connect to smartphones, tablets, or
computers using your projector as an access point. When you use this
method, connect the projector using Quick Connection Mode of the Epson
Wireless Network Projection 135
iProjection software, using Screen Mirroring, or using the optional wireless
presentation system.
• Infrastructure mode lets you connect to smartphones, tablets, or computers
over a wireless network access point. When you use this method, connect
the projector using Advanced Connection Mode of the Epson iProjection
software.
aWhen monitoring or controlling the projector using wireless LAN in
standby mode, connect your computer and projector with
infrastructure mode.
Your projector has built-in wireless LAN modules
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U). If you
install an additional optional wireless LAN module, you can use both network
connection methods at the same time. When you install the wireless LAN
module, set the Simple AP setting to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Simple AP
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Before you can project from your wireless network, you need to select
network settings for the projector.
Wireless Network Projection 136
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
bSet the Wireless LAN Power setting to On.
cSelect the Network menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
eTo identify the projector over the network, select Projector Name and
enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long.
fSet the Priority Control Interface setting to Wireless LAN.
gSelect the connection method.
• For simple AP mode, set the Simple AP setting to On and go to step
12.
• For infrastructure mode, set the Simple AP setting to Off and go to
next step.
• If you installed the optional wireless LAN module and want to use
both connection methods at the same time, set the Simple AP setting
to On and go to next step
Wireless Network Projection 137
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U
).
hSelect the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
The projector starts searching for access points.
aYou can also search for access points using the Search Access
Point setting manually.
iSelect the access point you want to connect to.
aIf you need to assign the SSID manually, select SSID to enter the
SSID.
jAssign the IP settings for your network as necessary.
• If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings to
set the DHCP setting to On.
• If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the
DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.
kTo prevent the IP address from being displayed on the network
information screen, set the IP Address Display setting to Off.
lSelect the Network Projection menu and press [Enter].
Wireless Network Projection 138
mTurn on the Projector Keyword setting if you want to prevent access to
the projector by anyone not in the room with it.
aWhen you turn on this setting, you must enter a displayed,
randomized keyword from a computer using Epson iProjection
to access the projector and share the current screen.
nSet the Epson iProjection setting to On.
oSelect the options as necessary.
•SSID Display lets you select whether to display projector's SSID on
the network information screen and Home screen.
•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's
network information.
•Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password
for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.
(No password is set by default.)
•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a
projector keyword on the projected image when accessing the
projector using Epson iProjection.
pWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
qPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wireless network settings are complete when you see the correct IP
address on the network information screen.
When you have finished making wireless settings for your projector, you need
to select the wireless network on your computer. Then start the network
software to send images to your projector through a wireless network.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows" p.138
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac" p.139
• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.179
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your
computer.
aTo access your wireless utility software, click the network icon on the
Windows taskbar.
Wireless Network Projection 139
bWhen connecting to devices over a wireless network access point, make
sure Wi-Fi is turned on and select the network name (SSID) of the
network the projector is connecting to.
cClick Connect.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network in Mac.
aClick the Wi-Fi icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
bWhen connecting to devices over a wireless network access point, make
sure Wi-Fi is turned on and select the network name (SSID) of the
network the projector is connecting to.
Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP
Mode
You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network with
simple AP mode. You can use WPA2-PSK security.
aContact your network administrator for guidance on entering the
correct information.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
cSelect Passphrase, press [Enter], and enter a passphrase from 8 to 63
characters long.
dWhen you finish entering a passphrase, go back to the Network
Settings screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save
your settings and exit the menus.
Setting Up Wireless Network Security for
Infrastructure Mode
You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network with
infrastructure mode. Set up one of the following security types to match the
settings used on your network:
• WPA3-PSK security
• WPA2/WPA3-PSK security
• WPA3-EAP security
• WPA2/WPA3-EAP security
aContact your network administrator for guidance on entering the
correct information.
Wireless Network Projection 140
aIf you want to set up WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP security, make
sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration
type and placed directly on a USB storage device.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
cSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
dSelect the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
eSelect the Security setting and press [Enter].
fSelect the security settings to match your network settings.
gDo one of the following according to the security you selected.
•WPA3-PSK or WPA2/WPA3-PSK: Select Passphrase, press [Enter],
and enter a passphrase from 8 to 63 characters long. Then go to step
16.
•WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP: Select EAP Type and press
[Enter].
hSelect the protocol for authentication as the EAP Type setting.
iTo import your certificate, select the certificate type and press [Enter].
•Client Certificate for the PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS type
•CA certificate for all EAP types
Wireless Network Projection 141
aYou can also register the digital certificates using your Web
browser. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate
may not install correctly.
jSelect Save and press [Enter].
kFollow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to
the projector's USB-A port.
lPress [Enter] to display the certificate list.
mSelect the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
nEnter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
oSelect your EAP settings as necessary.
•User name lets you enter a user name using up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. When importing a client certificate, the name the
certificate was issued to is automatically set.
•Password lets you enter a password using up to 64 alphanumeric
characters for authentication when using the PEAP or EAP-FAST
type.
•Verify Server Certificate lets you select whether or not to verify the
server certificate when a CA certificate has been set.
•RADIUS Server Name lets you enter the server name to be verified.
pWhen you finish making settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
gg Related Links
• "Supported Client and CA Certificates" p.141
• "Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser" p.166
Supported Client and CA Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)
Specification Description
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required
CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)
Specification Description
Format X509v3
Extension DER/CER/PEM
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Encoding BASE64/Binary
Wireless Network Projection 142
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device
After selecting the wireless network settings for your projector, you can
display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a mobile device using
the Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.
a• Make sure you have installed the latest version of Epson iProjection
on your device.
• You can download Epson iProjection for free from the App Store or
Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App
Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
• When using Epson iProjection in Quick connection mode, we
recommend making security settings.
• Set the Connection Guide Display setting to Off in the projector's
Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >Connection Guide Display
aPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The QR code is displayed on the projected surface.
a• If you do not see the QR code, set the Display LAN Info.
setting to Text & QR Code in the projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >
Epson iProjection >Display LAN Info.
• To hide the QR code, press [Esc].
• When the QR code is hidden, press [Enter] to display the code.
bStart Epson iProjection on your mobile device.
cRead the projected QR code using Epson iProjection to connect it to
the projector.
aTo correctly read the QR code, make sure you face the screen
squarely and closely enough so that the projected code fits into
the guide of the mobile device's QR code reader. If you are too
far from the screen, the code may not be read.
When a connection is established, select Contents menu from , and
then select the file you want to project.
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer
You can set up your USB flash drive as a USB key to quickly connect the
projector to a wireless LAN supported Windows computer. After creating the
USB key, you can quickly project images from the network projector.
aSet up the USB key using USB Key Setup Tool of the Epson iProjection
(Windows/Mac) software.
aSee the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for
instructions.
bMake sure the wireless LAN module is installed or built into your
projector.
cTurn on the projector.
dPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.
You see the network information screen. Verify that an SSID and IP
address are displayed.
eRemove the wireless LAN module from the projector's USB-A port (if
installed) and insert the USB key into the same port.
You see a projected message that the network information update is
complete.
Wireless Network Projection 143
fRemove the USB key.
If your projector needs the wireless LAN module, reinsert the wireless
LAN module into the projector.
gConnect the USB key to a USB port on your computer.
hFollow the on-screen instructions to install the necessary application.
a• If the Windows Firewall message is displayed, click Yes to
disable the firewall.
• You need administrator authority to install the software.
• If it is not installed automatically, double-click
MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key.
After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector.
iWhen you have finished projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove
Hardware option in the Windows taskbar, and then remove the USB
key from your computer.
aYou may need to restart your computer to reactivate your
wireless LAN connection.
gg Related Links
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Using the Wireless Presentation System to Connect
Windows/Mac Computers
You can use the optional wireless presentation system to quickly connect the
projector to computers wirelessly and project your image. Your wireless
presentation system (ELPWP10) includes two wireless transmitters
(ELPWT01) and one wireless LAN module (ELPAP11).
See the Epson Wireless Presentation System User's Guide for details.
gg Related Links
• "Setting Up the Wireless Presentation System for the First Time" p.143
• "Projecting with the Wireless Presentation System" p.144
Setting Up the Wireless Presentation System for the First Time
The first time you start using the wireless presentation system, you need to
make preparations such as pairing the wireless transmitters with the projector.
a• Select network settings for the projector before pairing.
• You need to pair the wireless transmitters again when you change
Projector Name or Passphrase in the Network Settings menu.
• You can also pair the wireless transmitters from your computer using
the Epson Wireless Transmitter Settings software. See the Epson
Wireless Transmitter Settings Operation Guide for details.
• You can download the necessary software and manuals from the
following Web site:
epson.sn
aTurn on the projector.
bConnect the wireless transmitter to the projector's USB-A port.
The network information is written and a completion message is
displayed. It may take some time to finish pairing.
Wireless Network Projection 144
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord or the wireless transmitter from the
projector while the network information is being written. If the power cord
or wireless transmitter is disconnected, the projector may not start
correctly. Make sure the completion message is displayed before
disconnecting the wireless transmitter.
cConnect the other wireless transmitters if you want to continue pairing.
dSelect Yes to set Connection Guide Display to On if necessary.
a• We recommend selecting Yes. The next time you turn on the
projector and no signal is being input, the connection guide for
the wireless transmitter (Epson Wireless Presentation) is
displayed.
• The message prompting you to set Connection Guide Display
to On is displayed when Connection Guide Display is set to
Off and Content Playback is set to Off.
• You can change the connection guide display from the
projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >Connection Guide
Display
eRemove the wireless transmitter from the projector and insert the
wireless LAN module into the same port used for the wireless
transmitter.
fPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
gMake sure Wireless LAN Power is set to On in the projector's
Management menu and Simple AP is set to On in the projector's
Network Settings menu.
We recommend turning the projector off and then back on to enable the
connection guide display.
aIf you set the Auto Power On setting to On in the projector's Network
menu, you can start projection even if the projector is in standby mode
(when the power is off).
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >Auto Power On
gg Related Links
• "Projector Network Settings - Network Menu" p.195
• "Installing the Wireless LAN Module" p.133
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually" p.135
• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode" p.139
Projecting with the Wireless Presentation System
You can use the paired wireless transmitter to quickly establish direct
connection between the projector (receiver) and Windows/Mac computers
and easily project your images.
aMake sure the wireless LAN module is installed into your projector.
aTurn on the projector.
bConnect the wireless transmitter to a USB port on your computer.
cProject your content with the Epson Wireless Presentation software in
the wireless transmitter. See the Epson Wireless Presentation System
User's Guide for details.
gg Related Links
• "Installing the Wireless LAN Module" p.133
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 145
You can send image to your projector from mobile devices such as laptops,
smartphones, and tablets using Miracast technology.
You can connect two devices that use Miracast technology at the same time.
The projector detects the input sources as Screen Mirroring1 and Screen
Mirroring2. You need to set the Interrupt Connection setting to Off.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Mirroring
>Interrupt Connection
If your device supports Miracast, you do not need to install any additional
software. When using a Windows computer, make sure the necessary adapter
for the Miracast connection is available.
Note the following limitations when using Screen Mirroring features.
• You cannot play an interlaced image.
• You cannot play multi-channel audio over 3ch (channel 3).
• You may not be able to project images depending the resolution and frame
rate.
• You cannot play 3D video.
• You may not be able to view contents with copyright protection with a
Miracast connection depending on your device.
• Do not change the projector's Screen Mirroring setting during Screen
Mirroring projection. Doing so may cause the projector to disconnect and it
may take a while to re-connect.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen
Mirroring
• Do not turn off the projector directly by the breaker during Screen
Mirroring projection.
aMobile devices with Android installed or Windows 8.1 or later installed
mainly support Miracast.
Support for Miracast varies depending on the mobile device. See your
mobile device manual for details.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings" p.145
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function" p.147
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10" p.148
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1" p.148
Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings
You must select Screen Mirroring settings for your projector to project
images from your mobile device.
aIf you use Windows 10, you can cast images using the following
connections:
• Casting images from your device to the projector directly
• Casting images via local area network
When you cast images via local area network, the connection is more
stable and secure. Do one of the following to connect your projector to
a local area network:
• Connect a LAN cable.
• Select the Wireless LAN setting to connect to the wireless access
point.
To connect to a wireless access point, you need to install the optional
wireless LAN module.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 146
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
bSet the Wireless LAN Power setting to On.
cSelect the Network menu and press [Enter].
dSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
eSelect Priority Control Interface and press [Enter].
fChoose one of the following options:
• If you cast the data via local area network using the wired LAN,
select Wired LAN.
• If you cast the data directly or via wireless access point, select
Wireless LAN.
• If your device only supports casting data directly, select Wireless
LAN.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 147
gSet the Simple AP setting to On.
hGo back to the Network Settings screen and select Network
Projection.
iSet the Screen Mirroring setting to On.
jSelect the options as necessary.
•Interrupt Connection lets you select to connect to another mobile
device during Screen Mirroring projection or to exclusively connect
to one device. If you want to use two Screen Mirroring sources, set
this to Off.
•Adjust Image Quality lets you adjust the screen mirroring
speed/quality. Select a small number to improve the quality and
select large number to increase the speed.
•HDMI Out Image Output lets you select to output Screen Mirroring
image to the HDMI Out port
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U
). HDCP and H.265 features are disabled and you may not be able to
project content with them. If you want to project content with
HDCP and H.265 features, select Off.
•Screen Mirroring Info displays connection information when
projecting the Screen Mirroring source.
kWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast
Function
If your mobile device such as a smartphone supports Miracast, you can
connect it to the projector wirelessly and project images. You can play audio
through the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.
aSelect the Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.
bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the network information screen.
cOn your mobile device, use your Miracast function to search for the
projector.
You see a list of available devices.
dSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.
eIf you see the PIN entry screen on your mobile device, enter the PIN
code displayed on the network information screen or at the upper left
of the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your mobile device.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 148
aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Depending on the mobile device, you may need to delete a device
when connecting. Follow the on-screen instructions on your
device.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10
You can set up your computer for wireless projection and play audio through
the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.
aSelect the Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.
bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the network information screen.
cHold down the Windows key and press Kon your keyboard at the
same time.
You see a list of available devices.
dSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.
eIf you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code
displayed on the network information screen or at the bottom right of
the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your computer.
aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1
You can set up your computer for wireless projection from Charms in
Windows 8.1. You can play audio through the projector's speaker system by
connecting using Screen Mirroring.
aSelect the Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.
bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the network information screen.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 149
cOn your computer, select Devices from Charms and select Project.
dSelect Add a wireless display.
You see a list of available devices.
eSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.
fIf you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code
displayed on the network information screen or at the bottom right of
the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your computer.
aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Secure HTTP 150
You can use the HTTPS protocol to increase security between the projector
and a Web browser communicating with it. To do this, you create a server
certificate, install it on the projector, and turn on the Secure HTTP setting in
the projector menus to verify the reliability of the Web browser.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Projector Control >Secure HTTP
Even if you do not install a server certificate, the projector automatically
creates a self-signed certificate and allows communication. However, because
the self-signed certificate cannot verify reliability from a Web browser, you
see a warning about the server's reliability when you access the projector from
a Web browser. This warning does not prevent communication.
gg Related Links
• "Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus" p.150
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus
You can create your Web server certificate and import it using the projector
menus and an external storage device.
a• You can use a USB flash drive as an external storage device for this
model.
• You can also register the digital certificates from your Web browser.
However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not
install correctly.
aMake sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration and directly placed on the USB storage device.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
cSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
dSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].
eSet the Secure HTTP setting to On.
fSelect Web Server Certificate and press [Enter].
gSelect Save and press [Enter].
hFollow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to
the projector's USB-A port.
iPress [Enter] to display the certificate list.
jSelect the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
kEnter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
gg Related Links
• "Supported Web Server Certificates" p.151
Secure HTTP 151
• "Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser" p.166
Supported Web Server Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)
Specification Description
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Common name Network host name
Organization Optional
Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required
Screen Sharing 152
You can distribute the currently projected screen image to up to four
projectors that are connected to the same network. This allows you to view
the image at the same time from other projectors.
Note the following limitations when using the Screen Sharing function.
• You can share the screen with projectors that support the screen sharing
feature.
• If the firmware version amongst the projectors sharing the screen is not the
same, you may need to update the projector's firmware to share your screen.
• You cannot distribute images that are protected by HDCP.
• You cannot change the projector's Network settings during Screen Sharing.
gg Related Links
• "Sharing the Screen" p.152
• "Receiving Shared Screen Images" p.154
Sharing the Screen
Before sharing the screen, you need to select settings on your projector.
• Connect the projector to the network.
• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing
• If you want to skip authentication of keywords for other projectors so you
can quickly connect to them, set the Connection Mode setting to Keyword
Off.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing
>Connection Mode
aTurn on the projector and display an image.
bPress the [Home] button.
cSelect Screen Sharing.
Screen Sharing 153
dSelect Start Screen Sharing.
eSpecify the projector you want to share your screen with.
AEnter the IP address using the numeric keypad.
BEnter the projector keyword using the numeric keypad, if required. The
projector keyword is displayed on the projected image of the receiving
projector.
CDisplays the connection history. To connect to a projector that you have
previously connected to, select the IP address from the displayed list.
fSelect Connect.
When the connection is established, the bar indicating the shared status
appears at the upper right of the screen. You can drag and drop the
shared status bar position.
gRepeat steps 3 and 6 as needed to connect to more projectors.
hSelect the input source to project images you want to share.
The image is distributed to the receiving projectors.
gg Related Links
• "Finishing the Screen Sharing" p.153
Finishing the Screen Sharing
To finish sharing, select the icon on the shared status bar. This option
disconnects all projectors at one time. If you want to disconnect specific
projector, follow the steps below.
aPress the [Home] button.
Screen Sharing 154
bSelect Screen Sharing.
cSelect the projector you want to disconnect and select Disconnect.
The selected projector is disconnected and screen sharing finishes to
this projector.
dRepeat step 3 as needed to disconnect to more projectors.
aWhen you select Disconnect All, the button changes to Confirm.
Select the button again to disconnect all projectors.
Receiving Shared Screen Images
Before receiving the screen, you need to select settings on your projector.
• Connect the projectors to the same network as the projector that is sharing
images.
• Make sure that no other device is connecting to the projector using the
Epson iProjection software.
• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing
When the other projector starts sharing screen, the shared screen image is
automatically displayed.
If not, press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
To remove the shared image during projection, press the [Esc] button.
aIf you do not have the IP address for your projector, press the [Home]
button and select Screen Sharing. You can check the IP address
displayed on the guide screen.
Monitoring and Controlling the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to monitor and control the projector over a network.
gg Related Links
• "Epson Projector Management" p.156
• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser" p.157
• "Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser" p.166
• "Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts" p.168
• "Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP" p.169
• "Using ESC/VP21 Commands" p.170
• "PJLink Support" p.171
• "Crestron Connected Support" p.172
• "Operating the Projector Using Web API" p.173
• "Setting Projector Event Schedules" p.174
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 157
Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select
projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web browser.
This lets you access the projector remotely.
In Content Playback mode, you can also edit playlists.
Attention
In Content Playback mode, do not remove the USB flash drive from the projector
or disconnect the projector's power cord in the following situations. Data saved on
the USB flash drive may be damaged.
• When the Playlists screen is displayed
• When the USB Memory Device screen is displayed
a• Make sure the computer and projector are connected to the network.
If you are connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a wireless
network access point.
• You can use the following Web browsers.
• Internet Explorer 11 or later (Windows)
• Microsoft Edge (Windows)
• Safari (Mac, iOS)
• Chrome (Android)
• While using the Web browser, do not connect using a proxy server.
You cannot select all of the projector menu settings or control all
projector functions using a Web browser.
• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the
projector's Operation menu, you can use a Web browser to select
settings and control projection even if the projector is in standby
mode (when the power is off).
• You can also control the projector using a Web browser through the
Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.
aMake sure the projector is turned on.
bMake sure your computer or device is connected to the same network
as the projector.
cStart your Web browser on the computer or device.
dGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box. When entering an IPv6 address,
wrap the address with [ and ].
You see the Epson Web Control screen.
• In normal mode
AControls the projector remotely.
BDisplays a test pattern.
COpens the Crestron Connected operation window. Available only when
you set the Crestron Connected system.
DSets detailed projector settings.
EDisplays the projector's status.
FOperates the projector's menu settings with your finger or mouse.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 158
aYou can also check the projector's log files by entering
"https://<projector's IP address>/logs/" into your browser's
URL bar when you set Log Save Destination to USB and
Internal Memory in the projector's Management menu.
• In Content Playback mode
AControls the projector remotely.
BSelects the playlist you want to play, and allows you to create or edit
playlists.
CDisplays the Time Table screen.
DOperates the projector's menu settings with your finger or mouse.
EDisplays the projector's status.
FOpens the Crestron Connected operation window. Available only when
you set the Crestron Connected system.
GSets detailed projector settings.
HDisplays the Developer's Menu screen.
IDisplays a test pattern.
JRegisters or deletes the data for a playlist on the USB flash drive.
eSelect the option corresponding to the projector function you want to
control.
a• You may need to log in to access some of the options on the
Epson Web Control screen. If you see a log in window, enter
your user name and password.
• When accessing the Basic Control option, the user name is
EPSONREMOTE and the default password is guest.
• When accessing other options, the user name is
EPSONWEB and the default password is admin.
• You can change the password in the projector's Network
menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Remote Password
sNetwork >Network Settings >Web Control Password
gg Related Links
• "Web Control Options" p.158
Web Control Options
Basic Control
Options on the Basic Control screen allow you to select the input source and
control the projector.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 159
a• If you see a log in window, enter your user name and password. (The
user name is EPSONREMOTE and the default password is guest.)
• You can change the password in the projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Remote Password
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BTurns the projector on or off.
CSelects the input source. (The available sources vary depending on your
projector model.)
DTurns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
EPauses or resumes images.
FDisplays the QR code.
GAdjusts the speaker volume.
HSearches for sources.
OSD Control Pad
Options on the OSD Control Pad screen allow you to display the projector's
setting menus and select them moving your finger or mouse on the pad.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BDisplays the projector's setting menus.
CUse your finger or mouse to navigate the menus.
DResets the selected setting to its default value.
EReturns to the previous menu.
FDisplays help topics.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 160
Test Pattern
The Test Pattern screen displays the available test patterns and allow you to
select to project it.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BDisplays available test patterns; select to project a test pattern.
CTurns off test pattern display.
Status Information
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BDisplays a list of monitored settings.
CDisplays the setting status.
DSelect to view different status information.
Advanced
The Advanced screen allow you to select the projector's settings.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 161
aIf the default Web Control Password is set, a screen prompting to
change the password appears before you can view the Advanced
screen. Follow the on-screen instructions to change the password.
It is strongly recommended to change password regularly to prevent an
unauthorized access to your projector.
AOpens the menus.
BDisplays the menu name you selected.
CSpecifies the projector settings. (The available settings vary depending on your
projector model.)
DLock/unlock the projector settings.
EUpdates the projector settings.
aYou cannot change the following settings using Epson Web Control.
•EDID
•HDMI Link
•Fixed Installation
•Image Shift (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU)
•Split Screen Setting
•Content Playback
•User Button
•User's Logo
•Wireless LAN Diagnosis
•Language
•Search Access Point
•Crestron Connected
•HDBaseT Signal Level
•Event ID
•HDBaseT Tx
•Antenna Level
•Start Pairing
•Reset Network Settings
•Firmware Update
aYou can select the following settings only with Epson Web Control.
• Monitor Password (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
• IPv6 Settings (manual)
• HTTP port (port number used for Web Control except for 80
[default], 843, 3620, 3621, 3625, 3629, 4352, 4649, 5357, 10000,
10001, 41794)
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 162
Remote (only in Content Playback mode)
Options on the Remote screen allow you to select the input source, control
the projector, and start projecting playlists.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BTurns the projector on or off.
CSelects the input source. (The available sources vary depending on your
projector model.)
DTurns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
EOverlay Effect option is displayed when the current source is anything other
than USB.
Turns Overlay Effect on or off to add color and shape effects to a playlist.
When turning on, the Effects screen is displayed. You can add predefined color
and shape effect filters to a playlist. You can also create a customized effect.
FSpecifies the screen settings.
GDisplays your favorite playlists. Select a playlist to start projecting.
HDisplays information for the playlist being projected.
The icons indicate the playlist settings.
: Overlay effects have been applied
: Repeat playback has been applied
: Length of the playlist
Select the arrow at the bottom-left to display the following screen.
IAdjusts the speaker volume.
Screen displayed while projecting playlist (only in Content Playback mode)
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 163
AStops projection.
BTurns the video and audio on or off temporarily. However, the audio and video
continue to run so you cannot resume projection at the point you activated this
function.
CAdjusts the speaker volume.
DOpens the Effects screen. You can select preset effects or select individual
brightness, color, and shape effect filters.
Playlist (only in Content Playback mode)
Options on the Playlist screen allow you to select the playlist you want to play
from the list, and create or edit playlists.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BStarts projecting the playlist.
The icons indicate the playlist settings.
: Number assigned to your favorite playlists
: Repeat playback has been applied
: Overlay effects have been applied
COpens the menu that allows you to edit, copy, register to your favorites, or
delete the playlist.
When you select Edit or Duplicate, the edit playlist screen is displayed.
DOpens the create playlist screen where you can create a new playlist.
Create or edit playlist screen (only in Content Playback mode)
AEdits the playlist name.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 164
BSelects whether to enable repeat playback or not.
CRegisters the playlist as favorites.
When registering favorites, you can quickly start playback of the favorite playlist
using the Remote screen or the remote control.
DDisplays the images or movies you have added to the playlist. The playlist plays
the images or movies in order.
EAdds images or movies to the playlist.
FDeletes images or movies from the list.
GOpens the Switch Image screen.
You can specify the time interval to switch to the next image file. You can also
select a transition effect.
HOpens the Effects screen.
You can add predefined color and shape effect filters to a playlist. You can also
create a customized effect.
IPreviews the playlist.
USB Memory Device (only in Content Playback mode)
Options on the USB Memory Device screen allow you to upload data for a
playlist to the USB flash drive or delete the data on the USB flash drive.
aYou can upload .avi, .jpeg (.jpg), .webp, .bmp, or .gif files.
If you want to add the .mp4 and .mov files to the playlist, use the
Epson Projector Content Manager software or the Epson Creative
Projection app.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BCopies images or movies you want to add to playlists to a USB flash drive.
CDeletes images or movies on the USB flash drive.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 165
Time Table (only in Content Playback mode)
Options on the Time Table screen allow you to enable or disable the specified
time table features.
AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.
BTurns the time table on or off.
aYou can specify when each playlist starts and finishes using the time
table feature in the Epson Projector Content Manager software.
For details, see the Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide.
Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser 166
You can register the digital certificates on the projector to provide security for
your presentation files.
aYou can also register the digital certificates in the projector's Network
menu. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not
install correctly.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >Client Certificate
sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >CA certificate
sNetwork >Network Settings >Projector Control >Secure HTTP
>Web Server Certificate
aMake sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration.
bMake sure the projector is turned on.
cStart your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the
network.
dGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box.
You see the Epson Web Control screen.
eSelect Advanced.
a• You may need to log in before you see the Advanced screen. If
you see a log in window, enter your user name and password.
(The user name is EPSONWEB and the default password is
admin.)
• You can change the password in the projector's Network
menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Web Control Password
fUnder Network, select Certificate.
gSelect the certificate file you want to register.
hEnter the password in the Password box, and then click Send.
Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser 167
iWhen you finish registering the certificate, click Apply to finalize your
changes and complete the registration.
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts 168
You can set up the projector to send you an e-mail alert over the network if
there is a problem with the projector.
If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's
Operation menu, you can receive the e-mail alerts even if the projector is in
standby mode (when the power is off).
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
cSelect the Mail Notification menu and press [Enter].
dSet the Mail Notification setting to On.
eEnter the IP address for the SMTP Server option.
aDo not use "127.x.x.x" (where x is a number from 0 to 255) for
the SMTP Server.
fSelect a type of Authentication of SMTP server.
gSelect a number for the SMTP server Port Number, from 0 to 65535
(default is 25).
hEnter a User Name for the SMTP server.
iEnter a Password for the SMTP server authentication.
jEnter the e-mail address to be indicated as the sender in From.
kChoose an address field, enter the e-mail address, and select the alerts
you want to receive. Repeat for up to three addresses.
aYour e-mail address can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters
long.
lWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
aIf a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not
receive an e-mail alert.
gg Related Links
• "Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages" p.168
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages
When a problem occurs with a projector on the network, and you selected to
receive e-mail alerts, you receive an e-mail containing the following
information:
• The email address set in From as the mail sender
•Epson Projector in the subject line
• The name of the projector experiencing a problem
• The IP address of the affected projector
• Detailed information about the problem
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP 169
Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) software on network computers so they can monitor projectors. If
your network uses this software, you can set up the projector for SNMP
monitoring.
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
cSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].
dSet the SNMP setting to On.
eEnter up to two IP addresses to receive SNMP notifications as the Trap
IP Address 1 and Trap IP Address 2 settings, using 0 to 255 for each
address field.
aDo not use these addresses: 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255.
This projector supports SNMP agent version 1 (SNMPv1).
fEnter the SNMP Community Name up to 32 alphanumeric characters
long.
gWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
Using ESC/VP21 Commands 170
You can control the projector from an external device using ESC/VP21.
gg Related Links
• "ESC/VP21 Command List" p.170
• "Cable Layouts" p.170
ESC/VP21 Command List
When the power ON command is transmitted to the projector, the power
turns on and it enters warm-up mode. When the projector's power has turned
on, a colon ":" (3Ah) is returned.
When a command is input, the projector executes the command and returns a
":", and then accepts the next command.
If the command being processed terminates abnormally, an error message is
output and a ":" is returned.
You can check the available commands in the projector's Specifications.
gg Related Links
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Cable Layouts
Serial connection
• Connector shape: D-Sub 9-pin (male)
• Projector input port name: RS-232C
• Cable type: Crossover (null modem) cable
In the following illustration, the projector side is shown on the left, and the
computer side on the right:
Signal name Function
GND Signal wire ground
TD Transmit data
RD Receive data
Communications protocol
• Default baud rate setting: 9600 bps
• Data length: 8 bit
• Parity: None
• Stop-bit: 1 bit
• Flow control: None
PJLink Support 171
PJLink was established by the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and
Information System Industries Association) as a standard protocol for
controlling network-compatible projector's as part of their efforts to
standardize projector control protocols.
The projector complies with the PJLink Class2 standard established by the
JBMIA.
The port number used for the PJLink search function is 4352 (UDP).
You need to make network settings before you can use PJLink.
It complies with all commands except for the following commands defined by
PJLink Class2, and agreement was confirmed by the PJLink standard
adaptability verification.
http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
• Non-compatible commands
You can check the non-compatible commands in the projector's
Specifications.
• Input ports and corresponding input source number
Input port name Input source number
Computer1 11
Computer2 12
HDMI1 32
HDMI2 33
USB 41
LAN 52
HDBaseT 56
Screen Mirroring1 57
Screen Mirroring2 58
• Manufacturer name displayed for "Manufacture name information query"
EPSON
• Model name displayed for "Product name information query"
• EPSON L735U/L730U
• EPSON L720U
• EPSON L635SU/L630SU
• EPSON L630U
• EPSON L530U
• EPSON L520U
gg Related Links
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Crestron Connected Support 172
If you are using the Crestron Connected network monitoring and control
system, you can set up your projector for use on the system. Crestron
Connected lets you control and monitor your projector using a Web browser.
a• You cannot use the Message Broadcasting feature in Epson Projector
Management when you use Crestron Connected.
For additional information on Crestron Connected, visit the Crestron Web
site.
https://www.crestron.com/products/line/crestron-connected
To monitor devices in the system, you can use Crestron RoomView Express
or Crestron Fusion provided by Crestron. You can communicate with the
help desk and send emergency messages. See the following Web site for
details.
http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
This manual describes how to perform operations on your computer using a
Web browser.
gg Related Links
• "Setting Up Crestron Connected Support" p.172
Setting Up Crestron Connected Support
To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron
Connected system, make sure your computer and projector are connected to
the network.
If you are connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a wireless network
access point.
aIf you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the
projector's Operation menu, you can use a Web browser to select
settings and control projection even if the projector is in standby mode
(when the power is off).
aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].
bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].
cSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].
dSet the Crestron Connected setting to On to allow the projector to be
detected.
eWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings
screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your
settings and exit the menus.
fTurn off the projector, and then turn it on again to enable the setting.
gStart your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the
network.
hGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box.
iSelect the Crestron Connected settings. See the Crestron Web site for
details.
Operating the Projector Using Web API 173
You can use Web API to operate the projector in Content Playback mode. See
the Web API Specifications for Projectors for details.
a• You can authenticate Web API communications using API
authentication (Digest authentication).
• The user name for API authentication is EPSONWEB; use the
password that is set for Web Control Password.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Web Control Password
gg Related Links
• "Enabling Web API" p.173
• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10
Enabling Web API
You can enable Web API from a Web browser.
aSelect Developer's Menu on the Epson Web Control screen.
bSet Enable API to On.
Setting Projector Event Schedules 174
You can schedule up to 30 events to occur automatically on your projector,
such as turning the projector on or off or switching the input source. The
projector performs the selected events on the specified date and time in the
schedule you set up.
Warning
Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you schedule the projector
to turn on automatically, flammable objects in front of the lens could catch on a
fire.
a• If you set a Menu Protection of Schedule to On, turn it off first.
aSet the date and time in the Date & Time menu in the projector's
Management menu.
bPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press
[Enter].
cSelect Schedule Settings and press [Enter].
dSelect Schedule and press [Enter].
eSelect Add New and press [Enter].
Setting Projector Event Schedules 175
fSelect the event details you want to perform.
gSelect the date and time at which you want the event to occur.
hSelect Save and press [Enter].
The scheduled events are displayed on the screen with icons indicating
the event status.
A: valid schedule
: regular schedule
: invalid schedule
BThe date currently selected (highlighted)
C: one time schedule
: regular schedule
: standby schedule (turns communication on or off during standby)
: invalid schedule
iTo edit a scheduled event, select the schedule and press [Esc].
Setting Projector Event Schedules 176
jSelect an option from the menu displayed.
•On or Off lets you enable or disable the selected event.
•Edit lets you change the event details or date and time.
•Clear lets you remove the scheduled event from a list.
kSelect Setup complete, then select Yes.
To delete all scheduled events, select Schedule Reset.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.125
• "Setting the Date and Time" p.45
Adjusting the Menu Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to access the projector menu system and change projector settings.
gg Related Links
• "Using the Projector's Menus" p.178
• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.179
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.185
• "Projector Display Settings - Display Menu" p.187
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Projector Network Settings - Network Menu" p.195
• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.203
• "Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu" p.205
• "Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu" p.206
• "Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)" p.207
Using the Projector's Menus 178
You can use the projector's menus to adjust the settings that control how your
projector works. The projector displays the menus on the screen.
aPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
You see the menu screen.
bPress the up or down arrow buttons to move through the menus listed
on the left. The settings for each menu are displayed on the right.
cTo change settings in the displayed menu, press [Enter].
dPress the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.
eTo return all the menu settings to their default values, select Initial/All
Settings.
fWhen you finish changing settings on a menu, press [Esc].
gPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
aThe arrow indicates that the menu contains sub items. When you
turn on a menu setting or select a specific value for it, the menu system
displays the sub items.
Using the Displayed Keyboard 179
You can use the displayed keyboard to enter numbers and characters.
aUse the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to
highlight the number or character you want to enter and press the
[Enter] button.
aEach time you select the A/a key, the characters change between
upper case and lower case. Each time you select the SYM1/2 key,
the symbols enclosed by the frame change.
bAfter entering the text, select OK on the keyboard to confirm your
entries. Select Cancel to cancel entering text.
aYou can select projector settings and control projection over a network
using a Web browser from your computer.
Some symbols cannot be entered using the displayed keyboard. Use
your Web browser to enter the text.
gg Related Links
• "Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.179
Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard
You can enter the following text when using the displayed keyboard.
Text type Details
Numbers 0123456789
Alphabet ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY
Z
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]
^_`{|}~
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu 180
Settings on the Image menu let you adjust the quality of your image. The
available settings depend on the currently selected color mode and input
source.
Setting Options Description
Color Mode See the list of
available color
modes
Adjusts the vividness of image colors for
various image types and environments.
Brightness Various levels
available
Lightens or darkens the overall image.
Contrast Various levels
available
Adjusts the difference between light and
dark areas of the image.
Color Saturation Various levels
available
Adjusts the intensity of the image colors.
Tint Various levels
available
Adjusts the balance of green to magenta
tones in the image.
Setting Options Description
Sharpness Various levels
available
Adjusts the sharpness or softness of
image details.
White Balance Color Temp. Sets the color temperature according to
the color mode you selected. Higher
values tint the image blue and lower
values tint the image red.
Setting is only displayed when Color
Filter is not set to Warm White or Cool
White.
sOperation >Content Playback >
Overlay Effect >Color Filter
G-M Correction Makes fine adjustments to the color tone.
Higher values tint the image green and
lower values tint the image red.
Custom Adjusts the individual R (red), G (green),
and B (blue) components of the offset
and gain.
Dynamic Contrast High Speed
Normal
Off
Adjusts the projected luminance based
on the image brightness.
Image
Enhancement
Image Preset Mode Sets the Image Enhancement options as
a batch using preset values.
Noise Reduction Reduces flickering in images.
MPEG Noise
Reduction
Reduces the noise or artifacts seen in
MPEG video.
Deinterlacing Sets whether or not to convert
interlaced-to-progressive signals for
certain video image types.
•Off: for fast-moving video images.
•Video: for most video images.
•Film/Auto: for movies, computer
graphics, and animation.
Setting is only displayed when the
current signal is interlaced signal
(480i/576i/1080i).
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu 181
Setting Options Description
Super-resolution Reduces blurring when projecting low
resolution images.
Detail
Enhancement
Creates a more emphatic texture and
material feel of the image.
Reset Resets all adjustment values on the
Image Enhancement setting to their
default settings.
Scene Adaptive
Gamma
Various levels
available
Adjusts the coloring according to the
scene, and obtains a more vivid image.
Select a large number to enhance
contrast.
This setting is unavailable when using
one of the following input sources:
• USB
• LAN
• Screen Mirroring
Gamma -2 to 2
Custom
Adjusts the coloring by selecting one of
the gamma correction values, or referring
to a gamma graph.
RGBCMY Various levels
available
Adjusts the hue, saturation, and
brightness of each color R (red), G
(green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta),
Y (yellow) individually.
Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for the current color
mode.
Source — Displays settings saved for each input
source.
To change settings for an input source,
make sure the source is connected and
select that source.
Setting Options Description
Resolution Auto
Normal
Wide
Manual
Sets the input signal resolution if not
detected automatically using the Auto
option.
Select Normal for 4:3 or 5:4 screens,
Wide for wide-screen, or Manual to
specify a resolution.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer.
Aspect See the list of
available aspect
ratios
Sets the aspect ratio (width-to-height
ratio) for the selected input source.
(Turn off the Scale setting or set the
Scale Mode setting to Full Display first.)
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer, HDMI, or
HDBaseT.
Analog Signal
Adjustment
Auto Setup Set to On to automatically optimize
computer image quality.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer.
Tracking Adjusts the signal to eliminate vertical
stripes in computer images.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer.
Sync. Adjusts the signal to eliminate fuzziness
or flickering in computer images.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer.
Position Adjusts the image location on the screen.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is Computer.
Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for current input
source.
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu 182
Setting Options Description
Scale Various scale
options
Enlarges or reduces the image
horizontally and vertically.
Adjusts the scale of the image displayed
by each projector when using multiple
projectors to project one image.
Reset Image
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Image menu to their default settings.
a• The Brightness setting does not affect light source brightness. To
change the light source brightness, select the Light Source
Brightness Control setting in the projector's Operation menu.
• You can restore the default settings of the Tracking,Sync., and
Position settings by pressing the [Auto] button on the remote
control.
gg Related Links
• "Available Color Modes" p.74
• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.72
• "Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment" p.75
• "Adjusting the Image Resolution" p.79
• "Scaling an Image" p.121
• "Adjusting the Image Color" p.76
Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu 183
Normally the projector automatically detects and optimizes the input signal
settings. If you need to customize the settings, you can use the Signal I/O
menu. The available settings depend on the currently selected input source.
Setting Options Description
Volume Various levels
available for each
source
Adjusts the volume of projector’s speaker
system.
You can also adjust the volume of
external speakers.
Setting is only displayed when the audio
is not output to AV system.
Source — Displays settings saved for each input
source.
To change settings for an input source,
make sure the source is connected and
select that source.
Setting Options Description
Signal Format Video Range Sets the video range to match the setting
of input source.
Setting is only displayed when the
current source is HDMI or HDBaseT.
Overscan Auto
Off
4%
8%
Changes the projected image ratio to
make the edges visible by a selectable
percentage or automatically.
Setting is only displayed when the input
signal is component signal.
Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for current input
source.
EDID HDMI1
HDMI2
HDBaseT
Describes the display capabilities of your
projector. Change this setting as
necessary according to the resolution of
the image.
Even in setups with multiple displays
with different resolutions, you can switch
the EDID of the current source and unify
the EDID across the displays by setting
the same EDID as the standard display.
HDMI IN EQ Level HDMI1
HDMI2
Adjusts the HDMI input signal level
depending on the devices connected to
the HDMI port. If there is a lot of
interference in the image, or if a problem
such as no image being projected occurs,
change the setting.
You can select the settings for individual
input sources without changing the input
source.
HDMI Out
Intensity
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
Off
Low
Medium
High
Adjusts the signal intensity input from
the HDMI port. Change this setting
when you cannot display the image
output from the HDMI port correctly.
Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu 184
Setting Options Description
A/V Output While Projecting
Always On
Set to Always On to output audio and
images to external devices when the
projector does not project any images.
Setting is only displayed in the following
cases:
•Quick Startup is set to Off in the
projector's Operation menu.
•Auto Power On is set to Off in the
projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >
Auto Power On
Audio Output Auto
Audio1
Audio2
Sets the audio input port when projecting
from any sources other than the
HDBaseT, LAN, and Screen Mirroring.
HDMI Audio
Output
HDMI1 Audio
Output
HDMI2 Audio
Output
Sets the audio input port when projecting
from HDMI ports.
Monitor Out Port Monitor Out
Computer2
Changes the input and output for the
Computer2/Monitor Out port. When
outputting images to an external
monitor, select Monitor Out. When
inputting image signals from a computer,
select Computer2.
HDMI Link Device
Connections
Lists the devices connected to the HDMI
ports.
Setting is only displayed when HDMI
Link is set to On.
HDMI Link Set to On to enable the HDMI Link
features.
Audio Out Device Selects whether to output audio from the
internal speakers or a connected
audio/video system.
Setting Options Description
Power On Link Controls what happens when you turn
on the projector or connected device.
•Bidirectional: automatically turns on
the connected device when you turn on
the projector, and vice versa.
•Device -> PJ: automatically turns on
the projector when you turn on the
connected device.
•PJ -> Device: automatically turns on
the connected device when you turn on
the projector.
Power Off Link Controls whether connected devices are
turned off when you turn off the
projector.
HDBaseT Control
Communications
Enables or disables communication from
the Ethernet and serial ports on the
HDBaseT transmitter or switcher;
turning on this setting disables the
projector's LAN and RS-232C ports.
Setting is only displayed when Extron
XTP is set to Off.
Extron XTP Set to On when you connect an Extron
XTP transmitter or switcher to the
HDBaseT ports. See the following
Extron Web site for more details on the
XTP system.
http://www.extron.com/
Reset Signal I/O
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Signal I/O menu to their default settings.
Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu 185
Settings on the Installation menu help you set up your projector in your
installation environment.
Setting Options Description
Fixed Installation On
Off
Set to On if you installed the projector in
a fixed location.
Test Pattern — Displays a test pattern to assist in
focusing and zooming the image and
correcting image shape (press the [Esc]
button to cancel pattern display).
Projection Front
Rear
Front/Ceiling
Rear/Ceiling
Sets the way the projector faces the
screen so the image is oriented correctly.
Setting Options Description
Geometry
Correction
H/V-Keystone Manually corrects horizontal and vertical
sides.
V-Keystone: lets you manually correct
vertical side.
V-Balance: lets you manually correct
vertical balance.
H-Keystone: lets you manually correct
horizontal side.
H-Balance: lets you manually correct
horizontal balance.
V-Balance and H-Balance are available
with
EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L6
30SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U only.
Quick Corner Corrects image shape and alignment
using an on-screen display.
Arc Correction Corrects the corners and sides of an
image projected on a curved surface.
Point Correction Divides the projected image into a grid
and corrects the distortion by moving the
selected point of intersection from side to
side and up and down.
Off Temporarily cancels the geometry
correction.
Memory Save customized sets of settings to
memory.
•Save Memory: saves the current shape
of an image you have adjusted.
•Load Memory: loads the settings you
made and saved.
•Rename Memory: changes the name
of the memory settings.
•Erase Memory: deletes a saved
memory.
•Reset Memory: Resets all saved
memories.
Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu 186
Setting Options Description
Digital Zoom
(EB‑L635SU/EB‑L6
30SU)
Various levels
available
Adjusts the size of the projected image.
Image Shift
(EB‑L635SU/EB‑L6
30SU)
Various positions
available
Shifts the image position horizontally
and vertically.
This feature is not available if the Digital
Zoom option is set to the widest setting.
E-Zoom
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L52
0U)
Various levels
available
Adjust the size of the image.
Setting is only displayed when Scale is set
to Off in the projector's Image menu.
Remote Receiver Front/Rear
Front
Rear
Off
Limits reception of remote control
signals by the selected receiver; Off turns
off all receivers.
Screen Type 4:3
16:6
16:9
16:10
Sets the aspect ratio of the screen to fit
the image into the projection area.
This setting is unavailable when using
one of the following input sources:
• USB
• LAN
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Screen Position Various positions
available
Shifts the image position horizontally
and vertically.
This feature is not available if you set the
Screen Type setting to the same aspect
ratio as the projector resolution.
High Altitude
Mode
On
Off
Regulates the projector’s operating
temperature at altitudes above 1500 m.
Source — Displays settings saved for each input
source.
To change settings for an input source,
make sure the source is connected and
select that source.
Setting Options Description
Blanking Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Hides an area of the projected image that
you select using the arrow buttons.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for current input
source.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Reset Installation
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Installation menu to their default
settings, except for the following:
•Digital Zoom
(EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU)
•Image Shift (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU)
•E-Zoom (EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U)
gg Related Links
• "Projection Modes" p.48
• "Image Shape" p.57
• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.24
• "Setting the Screen Type" p.50
Projector Display Settings - Display Menu 187
Settings on the Display menu let you customize various projector display
features.
Setting Options Description
No-signal Screen Black
Blue
Logo
Gradation
Sets the screen color or logo to display
when no signal is received.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Startup Screen On
Off
Set to On to display a logo when the
projector starts up.
Setting Options Description
Home Screen Auto
Disp.
On
Off
Set to On to display the Home screen
automatically when there is no input
signal when turning on the projector.
Setting is only displayed when
Connection Guide Display is set to Off
in the projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >
Connection Guide Display
Sort Source
Thumbnails
On
Off
Set to On to display the detected input
source in the upper left position of the
Home screen. The display order of the
input sources changes when the projector
detects an input signal.
Messages On
Off
Set to On to display messages such as
input source name, color mode name,
aspect ratio, no signal message, or high
temperature warning on your projected
image.
Menu Rotation Right 90 Degree
Left 90 Degree
Off
Rotates the menu display 90°.
Menu Color Black
White
Sets the color theme of the Home screen
and projector menu system.
Air Filter Notice On
Off
Set to On to display a message when a
clog in the air filter is detected.
Split Screen Setting Display Audio
Output Source
Set to On to display an icon with the
source providing audio output during
split screen projection.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Projector Display Settings - Display Menu 188
Setting Options Description
Align If you have split two screen images, select
the position of the images to be aligned
at the Top or Middle of the image area.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Reset Display
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Display menu to their default settings.
aIf you turn on Menu Protection of User's Logo, you cannot change the
following user's logo display settings; you must turn off Menu
Protection of User's Logo first.
•No-signal Screen
•Startup Screen
gg Related Links
• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.86
Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu 189
Settings on the Operation menu let you customize various projector features.
Setting Options Description
Auto Source Search On
Off
Set to On to detect the input signal
automatically and project images when
there is no input signal.
This function is disabled when you turn
on the projector in the Quick Startup
mode.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off.
Light Source
Brightness Control
Maintain
Brightness
Set to On to maintain a constant
brightness for the light source.
Maintain
Brightness Level
Select the brightness level you want to
maintain constantly.
Setting is only displayed when Maintain
Brightness is set to On.
Setting Options Description
Estimated Remains Displays how long the projector can
maintain constant brightness.
Setting is only displayed when Maintain
Brightness is set to On.
Light Source Mode Select the brightness for the light source.
•Normal: maximum brightness.
•Quiet: 70% brightness with reduced
fan noise.
•Extended: 70% brightness and extends
the life expectancy of the light source.
•Custom: select a custom brightness
level.
Setting is only displayed when Maintain
Brightness is set to Off.
Brightness Level Select the Custom brightness level you
want.
Setting is only displayed when Maintain
Brightness is set to Off.
Direct Power On On
Off
Set to On to turn on the projector by
plugging it in without pressing the power
button.
Auto Power On HDMI1
Computer1
Off
Sets the image source from which you
want to automatically start projection.
HDMI1: Automatically turns on the
projector when it detects power:
• When the image source turns on
• When the cable is connected to the
projector
Computer1: Automatically turns on the
projector when it detects an input signal
from the image source.
Sleep Mode On
Off
Set to On to automatically turns off the
projector after an interval of inactivity.
Sleep Mode Timer 1 to 30 minutes Sets the interval for Sleep Mode.
Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu 190
Setting Options Description
A/V Mute Timer On
Off
Turns off the projector automatically if
A/V Mute is enabled and 30 minutes of
inactivity has passed.
Standby Mode Communication
On
Communication
Off
Set to Communication On to allow
monitoring and controlling the projector
over a network when the projector is in
standby mode.
Setting is only displayed in the following
cases:
•A/V Output is set to While Projecting
in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
•USB Power is set to On While
Projecting.
•Auto Power On is set to Off in the
projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >
Auto Power On
Port Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Sets the port to use while the Standby
Mode setting is set to Communication
On.
Startup Source Various input
sources available
Select the image source you want to
project when the projector is turned on
in Content Playback mode.
Setting Options Description
Quick Startup 20min.
60min.
90min.
Off
Sets the time period for Quick Startup
mode. The projector enters this mode
when you turn it off. You can start
projecting in approximately 5 seconds by
pressing the power button.
However, it may take longer to become
ready for use in the following situations:
• When projecting from the projector's
USB port
• When projecting from the projector's
HDMI Out port
• When projecting using the Screen
Mirroring features
Setting is only displayed in the following
cases:
•A/V Output is set to While Projecting
in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
•Auto Power On is set to Off in the
projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >
Auto Power On
USB Power
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
On While
Projecting
Always On
Set to Always On to continue supplying
power to the streaming media player
when the projector is not projecting
images. This lets the streaming media
player start earlier, or perform its
firmware updates automatically over a
network if necessary.
Setting is only displayed in the following
cases:
•A/V Output is set to While Projecting
in the projector's Signal I/O menu.
•Auto Power On is set to Off in the
projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Transmitter Settings >
Auto Power On
Indicators On
Off
Set to Off to turn off the indicator lights
on the projector except when an error or
warning occurs.
Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu 191
Setting Options Description
Beep On
Off
Controls the beep that sounds when you
turn the projector on or off.
Release A/V Mute Any Button
A/V Mute
Select A/V Mute if you want to use only
the [A/V Mute] button to turn off A/V
Mute, or select Any Button to use any
button to turn it off.
Inv Direction
Button
On
Off
When suspending the projector from a
ceiling, set to On to invert the operation
direction of the control panel arrow
buttons.
Content Playback On
Off
Set to On to play back a playlist.
Overlay Effect Overlay Effect
Shape Filter
Color Filter
Lightness
Adds color and shape effects to the
projected image.
Setting is only displayed in the following
cases:
•Edge Blending is set to Off in the
projector's Multi-Projection menu.
• In Content Playback mode, the playlist
can be played and no writable error has
occurred.
USB Viewer — Selects and plays back a playlist saved on
the USB flash drive.
Reset Operation
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Operation menu to their default settings.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting in Content Playback Mode" p.94
• "Adjusting the Brightness" p.81
Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 192
Settings on the Management menu let you customize various projector
administrative features.
Setting Options Description
User Button Various menu
options available
Assigns a menu option to the [User]
button on the remote control for one-
touch access.
User's Logo Start Setting
Reset
Creates a screen that the projector
displays to identify itself and enhance
security.
Control Panel Lock Full Lock
Except for Power
Off
Controls projector button locking to
secure the projector:
•Full Lock: locks all buttons.
•Except for Power: locks all buttons
except the power button.
•Off: no buttons locked.
Setting Options Description
Color Uniformity Color Uniformity Set to On to adjust the color tone balance
for the whole screen.
Adjustment Level Sets the adjustment level.
Start Adjustments Adjusts the red, green, and blue color
tones individually for the selected area.
Reset Resets all adjustment values on the Color
Uniformity menu to their default
settings.
Refresh Mode Timer Sets a time period during which the
projector displays the refresh image.
Messages Set to On to display a message informing
you that the projector is in refresh mode.
Start Starts the refresh mode process to clear
any projected afterimage and turn off the
projector after a specified period of time.
Press any button on the remote control
to cancel this process.
Light Source
Calibration
Run Now Starts light source calibration to optimize
the white balance of the currently
projected image. You may not be able to
start calibration if the projector's
environmental temperature is out of
range. (Wait 20 minutes after turning on
the projector before starting calibration
for the best results.)
Run Periodically Set to On to perform light source
calibration periodically every 100 hours
of usage.
Last Run Displays the date and time of the last
light source calibration.
Date & Time Date & Time
Daylight Saving
Time
Internet Time
Adjusts the projector's system time and
date settings. Select Daylight Saving
Time to set daylight saving time settings
for your region. Select Internet Time to
automatically acquire the time from an
Internet time server.
Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 193
Setting Options Description
Schedule Settings — Schedules projector events to occur
automatically at selected dates and times.
Wireless LAN
Power
On
Off
Set to On to project images via a wireless
LAN. If you do not want to connect via
wireless LAN, turn it off to prevent
unauthorized access by others.
Wireless LAN
Diagnosis
Ping
IP Address
Ping until stopped
Start
Transmits Ping to confirm
communication status.
Log Save
Destination
Internal Memory
USB and Internal
Memory
Sets the location in which to save error
and operation log files.
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Batch Setup Range All
Limited
Select All to copy all of the projector
menu settings using the batch setup
feature. Select Limited, if you do not
want to copy the following settings:
•Password Protection settings
•EDID in the Signal I/O menu
•Network menu settings
Language Various languages
available
Select the language for projector menu
and message displays.
Information Various
information
Displays information about the projector
and input sources. The displayed items
vary depending on the current input
source.
Display Logs Display Status
Temp Warning
Info
Power On/Off
History
Displays log data saved to the location
specified in the Log Save Destination
setting.
Setting Options Description
Reset Management
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Management menu to their default
settings, except for the following:
•Language
aWhen you set Menu Protection of Schedule to On, you cannot change
settings on the Schedule Settings. Set Menu Protection of Schedule to
Off first.
gg Related Links
• "Event ID Code List" p.193
• "Saving a User's Logo Image" p.106
• "Locking the Projector's Buttons" p.126
• "Running Light Source Calibration" p.110
• "Adjusting the Color Tone (Color Uniformity)" p.109
• "Setting the Date and Time" p.45
• "Setting Projector Event Schedules" p.174
• "Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus" p.47
Event ID Code List
If the Event ID option on the Information screen displays a code number,
check this list of Event ID codes for the solution to the projector problem
associated with the code.
If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your network administrator or
Epson for technical support.
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0026
0032
0036
0037
A screen mirroring communication error has occurred. Turn the
projector off and then on again, or restart the network software.
Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 194
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0035
Unstable screen mirroring communication. Check the network
communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to
the network again.
0023
0024
0025
Connection failed. If you see the PIN entry screen on your
computer, enter the PIN code displayed on the network information
screen or at the bottom right of the projected image. If this does not
solve the problem, restart the projector and the connected devices,
and then check the connection settings.
0043 The video format is not supported. Change the resolution of the
mobile device, and then reconnect. Or change the Adjust Image
Quality setting for the projector, and then reconnect.
0432
0435
The network software did not start. Turn the projector off and then
on again.
0433 Cannot display the transferred images. Restart the network software.
0434
0481
0482
0485
Unstable network communication. Check the network
communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to
the network again.
0483
04FE
The network software quit unexpectedly. Check the network
communication status, then turn the projector off and then on again.
0484 Communication with computer was disconnected. Restart the
network software.
0479
04FF
A projector system error has occurred. Turn the projector off and
then on again.
0891 Cannot find an access point with the same SSID. Set your computer,
access point, and projector to the same SSID.
0892 The WPA/WPA2/WPA3 authentication type does not match. Make
sure the wireless network security settings are correct.
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0893 The TKIP/AES encryption type does not match. Make sure the
wireless network security settings are correct.
0894 Communication with an unauthorized access point was
disconnected. Contact your network administrator.
0895 Communication with a connected device was disconnected. Check
your device connection status.
0898 Failed to acquire DHCP. Make sure the DHCP server is operating
correctly. If you are not using DHCP, set the DHCP setting to Off in
the projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Wired LAN >IP Settings >
DHCP
sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >IP Settings >
DHCP
0899 Other communication errors.
089A The EAP authentication type does not match the network. Check the
wireless LAN security settings and make sure that the security
certificate is installed correctly.
089B EAP server authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security
settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed
correctly.
089C EAP client authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security
settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed
correctly.
089D Key exchange failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and
make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.
0920 The internal battery that saves the projector's date and time settings
is running low. Contact Epson for help.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 195
Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up
the projector for controlling over a network.
aWhen you set Menu Protection of Network to On, you cannot change
the network settings. Set Menu Protection of Network to Off first.
Setting Options Description
Wireless LAN Info. Various
information
Displays wireless network status and
details.
Wired LAN Info. Various
information
Displays wired network status and
details.
Network Settings — Configures your projector network
settings. See the network menu table for
details on the Network Settings.
Setting Options Description
Transmitter
Settings
Start Pairing Updates the network information of the
wireless transmitter from your computer
using the Epson Wireless Transmitter
Settings software. See the Epson Wireless
Transmitter Settings Operation Guide for
details.
This setting is only displayed when the
wireless LAN module is installed and
Simple AP is set to On in the projector's
Network Settings menu.
Auto Power On Set to On to turn on the projector
automatically when you connect a
computer using the optional wireless
presentation systems.
This setting is only displayed in the
following cases:
• When A/V Output is set to While
Projecting in the projector's Signal
I/O menu.
• When Quick Startup is set to Off in
the projector's Operation menu.
Connection Guide
Display
Set to On to automatically display the
connection guide for the wireless
transmitter (Epson Wireless
Presentation) instead of the Home screen
when there is no input signal when you
turn on the projector. The changed
setting takes effect the next time you turn
on the projector.
This setting is only displayed when
Content Playback is set to Off in the
projector's Operation menu.
Reset Network
Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Network menu to their default settings.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 196
aOnce you have connected your projector to your network, you can
select projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web
browser. This allows you to access the projector remotely.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.196
• "Using the Wireless Presentation System to Connect Windows/Mac
Computers" p.143
Network Menu - Network Settings Menu
Settings on the Network Settings menu let you select the basic network
settings.
aIf you are connecting via wireless LAN, make sure the followings to
enable wireless LAN settings:
• Install the wireless LAN module to your projector
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
• Turn on the Wireless LAN Power setting in the projector's
Management menu.
Setting Options Description
Projector Name Up to 16
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use " * + ,
/:;<=>?[\]`|
spaces)
Enter a name to identify the projector
over the network.
Setting Options Description
Remote Password Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use * :
spaces)
Enter a password for accessing the
projector using the Basic Control of the
Epson Web Control. (User name is
EPSONREMOTE; default password is
guest.)
Setting is only displayed when Content
Playback is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
Web Control
Password
Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use * :
spaces)
Enter a password for accessing the
projector over the Web. (User name is
EPSONWEB; default password is
admin.)
Priority Control
Interface
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Sets the priority gateway.
Simple AP On
Off
Set to On to enable simple access point
mode for direct connection between your
projector and input devices. Make sure
you are also doing the following:
• Using Quick Connection Mode of
Epson iProjection
• Using Screen Mirroring connection
• Using the optional wireless
presentation system
Setting is only displayed when Wireless
LAN Power is set to On in the
projector's Management menu.
SSID Automatically
assigned SSID
Displays the SSID of the projector for
selection on your device in simple AP
connections.
Security WPA2-PSK Displays the security type for simple AP
connections.
Passphrase Various
passphrases from 8
to 63 characters
Enter the passphrase of the projector for
entry on your device in simple AP
connections.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 197
Setting Options Description
Wireless LAN Sys. 802.11ac (Wi-Fi 5)
802.11n (Wi-Fi 4)
Sets the communication method between
the projector and the mobile device.
The available methods vary depending
on countries and regions.
Channel Various channels
available
Sets the frequency band (channel) using
in simple AP connections.
Wireless LAN — See the Wireless LAN menu table for
details.
Wired LAN — See the Wired LAN menu table for
details.
Mail Notification — See the Mail Notification menu table for
details.
Projector Control — See the Projector Control menu table for
details.
Network Projection — See the Network Projection menu table
for details.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.197
• "Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu" p.199
• "Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu" p.200
• "Network Menu - Projector Control Menu" p.200
• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.201
Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu
Settings on the Wireless LAN menu let you select the wireless LAN settings.
a• Turn on the Wireless LAN Power setting in the projector's
Management menu.
• If you did not install an optional wireless LAN module, turn off the
Simple AP setting to enable you to select wireless LAN settings
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U
).
• Install the optional wireless LAN module and turn off the Simple AP
setting to enable you to select wireless LAN settings
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
When connecting to a wireless network, it is strongly recommended that you
set security. When setting security, follow the instructions from the
administrator of the network system you want to connect to.
WPA is an encryption standard that improves the security for wireless
networks. The projector supports AES encryption methods.
aWPA2/WPA3-EAP and WPA3-EAP do not support WPA3 192-bit
security.
Setting Options Description
Search Access Point To Search View Search for available wireless network
access points. Depending on the access
point settings, they may not be displayed
in the list.
SSID Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
Enter the SSID (network name) of the
wireless LAN system the projector is
connecting to.
Security WPA2/WPA3-PSK Connects in WPA2/WPA3 personal
mode. Encryption method is selected
automatically according to the access
point settings. Set a passphrase which is
the same for the access point.
WPA2/WPA3-EAP Connects in WPA2/WPA3 enterprise
mode. Encryption method is selected
automatically according to the access
point settings.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 198
Setting Options Description
WPA3-PSK Connects in WPA3 personal mode.
Communication is performed using
WPA3 security. Uses AES method for
encryption. When establishing a
connection from a computer to the
projector, enter the value set in the
passphrase.
WPA3-EAP Connects in WPA3 enterprise mode.
Encryption method is selected
automatically according to the access
point settings.
Open Security is not set.
Passphrase
(For
WPA2/WPA3-PSK
and WPA3-PSK
security)
Various
passphrases from 8
to 63 characters
Enter the pre-shared passphrase used on
the network.
When the passphrase is entered and the
[Enter] button is pressed, the value is set
and displayed as an asterisk (*).
We recommend changing the passphrase
periodically for security. If the network
settings are initialized, it returns to the
initial passphrase.
EAP Type
(For
WPA2/WPA3-EAP
and WPA3-EAP
security)
PEAP Authentication protocol widely used in
Windows Server.
PEAP-TLS Authentication protocol used in
Windows Server. Select this when using a
client certificate.
EAP-TLS Authentication protocol widely used to
use a client certificate.
EAP-FAST Select this when these authentication
protocols are used.
Setting Options Description
User name Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a user name for the network. To
include a domain name, add it before a
backslash and the user name
(domain\username).
When importing a client certificate, the
name the certificate was issued to is
automatically set.
Password Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a password for authentication.
After you enter the password and select
Set, the password is displayed as an
asterisk (*).
Setting is only displayed when EAP Type
is set to PEAP or EAP-FAST.
Client Certificate — Imports the client certificate.
Setting is only displayed when EAP Type
is set to PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS.
Verify Server
Certificate
On
Off
Set to On to verify the server certificate
when a CA certificate has been set.
CA certificate — Imports the CA certificate.
RADIUS Server
Name
Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
Enter the server name to verify.
IP Settings DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Set DHCP to On if your network assigns
addresses automatically; set to Off to
manually enter the network's IP
Address,Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address using 0 to 255 for each address
field.
Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,
127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255) for IP Address,
255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through
254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 199
Setting Options Description
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Various IP
addresses
Enter the IP address for the DNS server,
using 0 to 255 for each address field. The
DNS server resolves the host name. Do
not use the following IP addresses:
127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to
255).
When these settings are not set and
remain as 0.0.0.0, DNS server
information is acquired using DHCP.
After acquiring the information, the
values remain as 0.0.0.0.
IPv6 On
Off
Set to On if you want to connect the
projector to the network using IPv6.
IPv6 is supported to monitor and control
the projector over a network using Epson
Web Control and PJLink.
Auto Configuration On
Off
Set to On to assign addresses
automatically according to the Router
Advertisement.
Use Temporary
Address
On
Off
Set to On if you want to use a temporary
IPv6 address.
IP Address Display On
Off
Set to On to display the IP address on the
network information screen and Home
screen.
Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu
Settings on the Wired LAN menu let you select the wired LAN settings.
Setting Options Description
IP Settings DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Set DHCP to On if your network assigns
addresses automatically; set to Off to
manually enter the network's IP
Address,Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address using 0 to 255 for each address
field.
Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,
127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255) for IP Address,
255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through
254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Various IP
addresses
Enter the IP address for the DNS server,
using 0 to 255 for each address field. The
DNS server resolves the host name. You
cannot use the following IP addresses:
127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to
255).
When these settings are not set and
remain as 0.0.0.0, DNS server
information is acquired using DHCP.
After acquiring the information, the
values remain as 0.0.0.0.
IPv6 On
Off
Set to On if you want to connect the
projector to the network using IPv6.
IPv6 is supported to monitor and control
the projector over a network using Epson
Web Control and PJLink.
Auto Configuration On
Off
Set to On to assign addresses
automatically according to the Router
Advertisement.
Use Temporary
Address
On
Off
Set to On if you want to use a temporary
IPv6 address.
IP Address Display On
Off
Set to On to display the IP address on the
network information screen and Home
screen.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 200
Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu
Settings on the Mail Notification menu let you receive an email notification if
a problem or warning occurs in the projector.
Setting Options Description
Mail Notification On
Off
Set to On to send an email to the preset
addresses when a problem or warning
occurs with a projector.
SMTP Server Various IP
addresses
Enter the IP address for the projector's
SMTP server using 0 to 255 for each
address field.
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x,
192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255).
Authentication Open
Auth
SSL
TLS
Select the authentication type of the
SMTP server.
Port Number 1 to 65535 (default
is 25)
Enter a number for the SMTP server Port
Number.
User Name Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a user name for the SMTP server.
Password Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a password for authentication on
the SMTP server.
From Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use " ( ) , : ;
< > [ \] spaces)
Enter the email address of the sender.
Address 1 Setting
Address 2 Setting
Address 3 Setting
Enter the e-mail address, and select the
alerts you want to receive.
Network Menu - Projector Control Menu
Settings on the Projector Control menu let you select settings for controlling
the projector over a network.
Setting Options Description
PJLink On
Off
Set to On to enable the PJLink
notification function.
PJLink Password Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use spaces
and any symbols
other than @)
Enter a password for using the PJLink
protocol for projector control.
Notified IP Address Various IP
addresses
Enter the IP address to receive the
projector's operating status when the
PJLink notification function is enabled.
Enter the addresses using 0 to 255 for
each address field.
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255).
SNMP On
Off
Set to On to monitor the projector using
SNMP. To monitor the projector, you
need to install the SNMP manager
program on your computer. SNMP
should be managed by a network
administrator.
Trap IP Address 1
Trap IP Address 2
Various IP
addresses
Enter up to two IP addresses to receive
SNMP notifications, using 0 to 255 for
each address field.
Do not use these addresses: 224.0.0.0
through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a
number from 0 to 255).
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 201
Setting Options Description
Community Name Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use spaces
and any symbols
other than @)
Enter the SNMP community name.
AMX Device
Discovery
On
Off
Set to On when you want to allow the
projector to be detected by AMX Device
Discovery.
Crestron
Connected
On
Off
Set to On only when monitoring or
controlling the projector over the
network using Crestron Connected.
Enabling Crestron Connected disables
the Epson Message Broadcasting feature
in the Epson Projector Management
software.
Control4 SDDP On
Off
Set to On to allow device information to
be acquired using Control4 Simple
Device Discovery Protocol (SDDP).
Secure HTTP On
Off
To strengthen security, communication
between the projector and computer in
Web control is encrypted. When setting
security with Web control, it is
recommended to set this to On.
Web Server
Certificate
— Imports the Web server certificate for
secure HTTP.
Network Menu - Network Projection Settings
Settings on the Network Projection menu let you select the settings relates to
network projection.
Setting Options Description
Projector Keyword On
Off
Set to On to enable a security password
to prevent access to the projector by
anyone not in the same room as the
projector. You must enter a displayed,
randomized keyword from a computer
using Epson iProjection to access the
projector and share the current screen.
Epson iProjection On
Off
Set to On to use Epson iProjection.
SSID Display On
Off
Set to On to display the SSID on the
network information screen and Home
screen.
Display LAN Info. Text & QR Code
Text
Sets the display format for the projector's
network information.
By simply reading the QR code with
Epson iProjection, you can connect the
mobile device to the projector through a
network.
Moderator
Password
Four-digit number Enter a password for accessing the
projector as a moderator using Epson
iProjection. (No password is set by
default.)
Keyword Interrupt
Display
On
Off
Set to On to display a projector keyword
on the projected image when accessing
the projector using Epson iProjection.
Available when Projector Keyword is set
to On.
Screen Mirroring On
Off
Set to On to use the Screen Mirroring
feature.
Interrupt
Connection
On
Off
Set to On to allows interruption of image
projection by another user.
Adjust Image
Quality
1 (Fine)
2
3
4 (Fast)
Adjusts the screen mirroring
speed/quality.
1: increases image quality.
4: increases processing speed.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 202
Setting Options Description
HDMI Out Image
Output
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
On
Off
Set to On to output Screen Mirroring
image to the HDMI Out port. HDCP and
H.265 features are disabled and you may
not be able to project content with them.
If you want to project content with
HDCP and H.265 features, select Off.
Screen Mirroring
Info.
On
Off
Set to On to display connection
information when projecting from a
Screen Mirroring source.
Message
Broadcasting
On
Off
Set to On to receive the message
delivered by Epson Projector
Management. See the Epson Projector
Management Operation Guide for details.
Setting is only displayed when Crestron
Connected is set to Off in the projector's
Projector Control menu.
Screen Sharing On
Off
Set to On to enable screen sharing
between network projectors.
Connection Mode Keyword On
Keyword Off
Set to Keyword Off to skip
authentication of keywords for other
projectors so you can quickly connect to
them.
gg Related Links
• "Screen Sharing" p.152
Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu 203
Settings on the Multi-Projection menu let you set up multiple projectors to
project a single unified image.
Setting Options Description
Projector ID Off
1 through 9
Assigns an ID for the projector when you
use multiple projectors.
HDMI Out Setting
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
Off
Pass Through
Set to Pass Through to enable up to 4
projectors connected via HDMI cables to
project a unified image.
When you select Pass Through, you can
project images only from HDMI1,
HDMI2, or HDBaseT sources.
Number of
Projectors
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
2 to 4 Sets the number of projectors used to
create a unified image area.
Setting is only displayed when HDMI
Out Setting is set to Pass Through.
Setting Options Description
Order
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L73
0U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑
L630SU/EB‑L630U/
EB‑L530U)
1 to 4 Sets the position of this projector in
number order from left to right.
Setting is only displayed when HDMI
Out Setting is set to Pass Through.
Tiling Layout
Location Setup
Sets the number of split screens and the
position of each image.
Setting is only displayed when HDMI
Out Setting is set to Off.
Geometry
Correction
— See the Installation menu table for
details on the Geometry Correction
settings.
Edge Blending Edge Blending
Top Edge
Bottom Edge
Left Edge
Right Edge
Line Guide
Pattern Guide
Guide Color
Blends the border between multiple
images to create a seamless screen.
Black Level Color Adjustment
Area Correction
Reset
Adjusts the black color of the
overlapping image area.
This setting is only displayed when
Blending is set to On for the Top Edge,
Bottom Edge,Left Edge, or Right Edge
setting.
Scale — See the Image menu table for details on
the Scale settings.
Color Uniformity — See the Management menu table for
details on the Color Uniformity settings.
Light Source Mode — See the Operation menu table for details
on the Light Source Mode settings.
Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu 204
Setting Options Description
Color Matching Adjustment Level
Red
Green
Blue
Brightness
Corrects the difference between the tint
and brightness of each projected image.
RGBCMY — See the Image menu table for details on
the RGBCMY settings.
Reset Multi-
Projection Settings
— Resets all adjustment values on the
Multi-Projection menu to their default
settings.
gg Related Links
• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.112
• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.185
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
• "Blending the Image Edges" p.116
• "Adjusting the Black Level" p.118
• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.36
Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu 205
Settings on the Memory menu let you manage saving and loading of image
quality settings in the projector's memory.
Setting Options Description
Save Memory Memory 1 to 10 Saves customized sets of settings to
memory.
Load Memory Memory 1 to 10 Loads saved memory settings and applies
them to the current image.
Rename Memory Memory 1 to 10 Changes the name of the memory
settings.
Erase Memory Memory 1 to 10 Deletes a saved memory.
Reset Memory
Settings
— Resets all saved memories.
gg Related Links
• "Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory" p.65
• "Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings" p.108
Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu 206
Settings on the Initial/All Settings menu let you reset certain projector
settings to their default values and place the projector in firmware update
mode so you can update the firmware.
Setting Options Description
Reset All — Lets you select menus for resetting the
settings to default values.
Firmware Update — Enters the firmware update mode and
ready to update firmware using the USB-
A or Service port.
Reset All options
When you select Reset All, you see the following screen.
If you do not want to reset values in particular menus, deselect the check box
next to the menu name. When you are ready to reset setting values, select
Execute.
You cannot reset the following settings:
•Digital Zoom (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU)
•Image Shift (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU)
•E-Zoom (EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U)
•Language
gg Related Links
• "Updating the Firmware" p.218
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 207
After selecting the projector's menu settings for one projector, you can use the
following methods to copy the settings to other projectors, as long as they are
the same model.
• by using a USB flash drive
• by connecting a computer and projector using a USB cable
• by using Epson Projector Management
You cannot copy any information unique to an individual projector, such as
Light Source Hours or Status.
a• Perform batch setup before adjusting the image settings such as
keystone distortion correction. Since image adjustment values are
also copied to another projector, the adjustments you made before
performing the batch setup are overwritten and the projected screen
you adjusted may change.
• When copying the menu settings from one projector to another,
user's logo is also copied. Do not register the information that you do
not want to share between multiple projectors as a user's logo.
• Make sure Batch Setup Range is set to Limited if you do not want to
copy the following settings:
•Password Protection settings
•EDID in the Signal I/O menu
•Network menu settings
sManagement >Batch Setup Range
Caution
Epson takes no responsibility for batch setup failures and associated repair costs
due to power outages, communication errors, or other problems that may cause
such failures.
gg Related Links
• "Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive" p.207
• "Transferring Settings From a Computer" p.208
Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive
You can copy menu settings from one projector to another of the same model
using a USB flash drive.
aThe USB flash drive must use a FAT format and not incorporate any
security function. Delete any files on the drive before using it for batch
setup or the settings may not be saved correctly.
aDisconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the
projector's indicators have turned off.
bConnect an empty USB flash drive directly to the projector's USB-A
port.
cHold down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel
and connect the power cord to the projector.
dWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Esc] button.
The indicators start flashing and the batch setup file is written to the
USB flash drive. When writing is finished, the projector turns off.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector
while the file is being written. If the power cord or USB flash drive is
disconnected, the projector may not start correctly.
eRemove the USB flash drive.
aThe file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If
you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA
using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the
PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be
able to recognize the file correctly.
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 208
fDisconnect the power cord from the projector to which you want to
copy settings, and check that all of the projector's indicators have
turned off.
gConnect the USB flash drive containing the saved batch setup file to the
projector's USB-A port.
hHold down the [Menu] button on the remote control or the control
panel and connect the power cord to the projector.
iWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Menu]
button.
When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being written.
When writing is finished, the projector turns off.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector
while the file is being written. If the power cord or USB flash drive is
disconnected, the projector may not start correctly.
jRemove the USB flash drive.
Transferring Settings From a Computer
You can copy menu settings from one projector to another of the same model
by connecting the computer and projector with a USB cable.
aYou can use this batch setup method with the following operating
system versions:
• Windows 7 and later
• OS X 10.11.x and later
aDisconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the
projector's indicators have turned off.
bConnect a USB cable to the computer's USB port and to the projector's
Service port.
cHold down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel
and connect the power cord to the projector.
dWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Esc] button.
The computer recognizes the projector as a removable disk.
eOpen the removable disk icon or folder, and save the batch setup file to
the computer.
aThe file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If
you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA
using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the
PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be
able to recognize the file correctly.
fEject the USB device (Windows) or drag the removable disk icon to the
Trash (Mac).
gDisconnect the USB cable.
The projector turns off.
hDisconnect the power cord from the projector to which you want to
copy settings, and check that all of the projector's indicators have
turned off.
iConnect the USB cable to the computer's USB port and to the
projector's Service port.
jHold down the [Menu] button on the remote control or the control
panel and connect the power cord to the projector.
kWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Menu]
button.
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 209
The computer recognizes the projector as a removable disk.
lCopy the batch setup file (PJCONFDATA.bin) that you saved to your
computer to the top level folder of the removable disk.
aDo not copy any files or folders other than the batch setup file to
the removable disk.
mEject the USB device (Windows) or drag the removable disk icon to the
Trash (Mac).
nDisconnect the USB cable.
When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being written.
When writing is finished, the projector turns off.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the file is being
written. If the power cord is disconnected, the projector may not start
correctly.
gg Related Links
• "Batch Setup Error Notification" p.209
Batch Setup Error Notification
The projector's indicators notify you if an error occurs during a batch setup
operation. Check the status of the projector's indicators and follow the
instructions described in the table here.
Indicator status Problem and solutions
• Laser: Orange - flashing
fast
• Temp: Orange - flashing
fast
The batch setup file may be corrupt, or the USB flash
drive may not be connected correctly.
Disconnect the USB flash drive, unplug and then plug
in the projector's power cord, and then try again.
Indicator status Problem and solutions
• Power: Blue - flashing
fast
• Status: Blue - flashing
fast
• Laser: Orange - flashing
fast
• Temp: Orange - flashing
fast
Writing the settings may have failed and an error may
have occurred in the projector's firmware.
Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet. Contact Epson for help.
Projector Maintenance 211
You may need to clean the projector's lens periodically, and clean the air filter
and air vents to prevent the projector from overheating due to blocked
ventilation.
The only parts you should replace are the air filter and remote control
batteries. If any other part needs replacing, contact Epson or an authorized
Epson servicer.
Warning
Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off and unplug the power cord.
Never open any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in this
manual. Dangerous electrical voltages in the projector can injure you severely.
Cleaning the Lens 212
Clean the projector's lens periodically, or whenever you notice dust or
smudges on the surface.
• To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the lens with lens-cleaning paper.
• To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens
cleaner and gently wipe the lens. Do not spray any liquid directly on the
lens.
Warning
Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated
by the projector may cause a fire.
Attention
Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the lens and do not
subject the lens to any impacts; otherwise, it could be damaged. Do not use
canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable residue.
Cleaning the Projector Case 213
Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the
power cord.
• To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
• To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild
soap. Do not spray liquid directly on the projector.
Attention
Do not use wax, alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the
projector case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases
may leave a flammable residue.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 214
Regular filter maintenance is important to maintain your projector. Clean the
air filter when a message appears telling you the temperature inside the
projector has reached a high level. It is recommended that you clean these
parts over a 20000‑hour period. Clean them more often than this if you use
the projector in an environment that is dustier than expected. (Assuming the
projector is used in an atmosphere in which airborne particulate matter is less
than 0.04 to 0.2 mg/m3.)
Attention
If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you
when the temperature inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait
until this warning appears to maintain your projector filter as prolonged exposure
to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector.
gg Related Links
• "Cleaning the Air Filters and Intake Vents" p.214
• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.216
Cleaning the Air Filters and Intake Vents
You need to clean the projector's air filters in the following situations:
• The filter or vents get dusty.
• You see a message telling you to clean it.
• The projector's Filter indicator flashes orange.
aTurn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
bCarefully remove the dust using a vacuum cleaner or a brush.
cTurn the projector upside down.
dLoosen the screws and open the air filter cover.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 215
ePull the air filter out of the projector.
fTap each side of the air filter 4 to 5 times to shake off any excess dust.
Attention
Do not use excessive force when tapping the air filter, or it may crack and
become unusable.
gVacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any
remaining dust.
Attention
• Do not rinse the air filter in water, or use any detergent or solvent to
clean it.
• Do not use canned air. The gases may leave a flammable residue or push
dust and debris into the projector's optics or other sensitive areas.
hPlace the air filter in the projector as shown.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 216
iClose the air filter cover and tighten the screws.
Replacing the Air Filter
You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:
• After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace
it.
• After cleaning the air filter, the projector's Filter indicator flashes orange.
• The air filter is torn or damaged.
You can replace the air filter while the projector is mounted to the ceiling or
placed on a table.
aTurn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
bTurn the projector upside down.
cLoosen the screws and open the air filter cover.
dPull the air filter out of the projector.
aDispose of used air filters according to local regulations.
• Filter frame: Polypropylene
• Filter: Polypropylene
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 217
ePlace the new air filter in the projector as shown.
fClose the air filter cover and tighten the screws.
Updating the Firmware 218
When you select the Firmware Update option in the projector's Initial/All
Settings menu, the projector enters firmware update mode and is ready to
perform a firmware update using the USB-A or Service port.
gg Related Links
• "Updating Firmware Using a USB Storage Device" p.218
• "Updating Firmware Using a Computer and USB Cable" p.219
Updating Firmware Using a USB Storage Device
You can update the projector's firmware using a USB storage device.
aResponsibility for updating the firmware lies with the customer. If a
firmware update fails due to problems such as a power failure or
communication problems, a fee will be charged for any necessary
repairs.
aDownload the projector firmware file from the Epson Web site.
bCopy the downloaded firmware file to the root folder (highest folder in
the hierarchy) of the USB storage device.
a• The USB storage device must be formatted in FAT format.
• Do not copy any other files to the USB storage device.
• Do not change the firmware's file name. If the file name is
changed, the firmware update will not start.
• Check that the firmware file you copied is the correct file for
your projector model. If the firmware file is not correct, the
firmware update will not start.
cConnect the USB storage device to the projector's USB-A port.
aConnect the USB storage device directly to the projector. If the
USB storage device is connected using a USB hub, the firmware
update may not be applied correctly.
dPress the [Menu] button, select the Initial/All Settings menu, and press
[Enter].
eSelect Firmware Update and press [Enter].
fSelect Yes to start the firmware update.
a• Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the
firmware is updating. If the power cord is disconnected, the
projector may not start correctly.
• Do not disconnect the USB storage device from the projector
while the firmware is updating. If the USB storage device is
disconnected, the update may not be applied correctly.
All of the projector's indicators start flashing and the firmware update
starts. When the update finishes normally, the projector enters standby
status (only the power indicator is lit blue). If Direct Power On is set to
On in the projector's Operation menu, the projector turns back on
again.
Updating the Firmware 219
When the update finishes, check the Information menu in the projector's
Management menu to make sure that the Version information has been
updated to the correct firmware version.
aWhen all indicators flash rapidly, the firmware update may have failed.
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and then reconnect it to
the projector. If the indicators continue to flash even after reconnecting
the power cord, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet and
contact Epson.
Updating Firmware Using a Computer and USB Cable
You can update the projector's firmware using a computer and a USB cable.
a• Responsibility for updating the firmware lies with the customer. If a
firmware update fails due to problems such as a power failure or
communication problems, a fee will be charged for any necessary
repairs.
• Your computer must be running one of the following operating
systems to update the firmware.
• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 10 (32- and 64-bit)
• macOS 10.13.x (64-bit)
• macOS 10.14.x (64-bit)
• macOS 10.15.x (64-bit)
aDownload the projector firmware file from the Epson Web site.
a• Do not change the firmware's file name. If the file name is
changed, the firmware update will not start.
• Check that the firmware file you copied is the correct file for
your projector model. If the firmware file is not correct, the
firmware update will not start.
bConnect the USB cable to the computer's USB port and to the
projector's Service port.
cPress the [Menu] button, select the Initial/All Settings menu, and press
[Enter].
dSelect Firmware Update and press [Enter].
eSelect Yes to start the firmware update.
aDo not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the
firmware is updating. If the power cord is disconnected, the
projector may not start correctly.
All of the projector's indicators turn on and the projector enters
firmware update mode. The computer recognizes the projector as a
removable disk.
Updating the Firmware 220
fOn the computer, copy the firmware file to the root folder (highest
folder in the hierarchy) of the removable disk.
a• Do not copy any other files or folders to the removable disk.
Otherwise, the files or folders may be lost.
• The projector turns off automatically if the USB cable or the
power cord are disconnected before the firmware file can be
copied to the removable disk. If this occurs, perform the
procedure again.
gPerform the steps to safely remove a USB device from the computer
and disconnect the USB cable from the projector.
All of the projector's indicators start flashing and the firmware update
starts. When the update finishes normally, the projector enters standby
status (only the power indicator is lit blue). If Direct Power On is set to
On in the projector's Operation menu, the projector turns back on
again.
When the update finishes, check the Information menu in the projector's
Management menu to make sure that the Version information has been
updated to the correct firmware version.
a• When all indicators flash rapidly, the firmware update may have
failed. Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and then
reconnect it to the projector. If the indicators continue to flash even
after reconnecting the power cord, remove the power plug from the
electrical outlet and contact Epson.
• If no operations are performed for 20 minutes in update mode, the
projector turns off automatically. If this occurs, perform the
procedure again.
Solving Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems using the projector.
gg Related Links
• "Projection Problems" p.222
• "Projector Indicator Status" p.223
• "Viewing the Status Display" p.226
• "Solving Image or Sound Problems" p.229
• "Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems" p.235
• "Solving Network Problems" p.237
• "Solutions to Problems in Content Playback Mode" p.240
• "Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function" p.241
Projection Problems 222
If the projector is not working properly, turn it off, unplug it, and then plug it
back in and turn it on.
If this does not solve the problem, check the following:
• The indicators on the projector may indicate the problem.
• The solutions in this manual can help you solve many problems.
If none of these solutions help, contact Epson for technical support.
Projector Indicator Status 223
The indicators on the projector indicate the projector status and let you know
when a problem occurs. Check the status and color of the indicators and then
refer to this table for a solution.
a• If the indicators display a pattern not listed in the table below, turn
the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for help.
• When the Indicators setting is set to Off in the projector's
Operation menu, all indicators are off under normal projection
conditions.
AWLAN (wireless LAN) indicator
BFilter indicator
CTemp (temperature) indicator
DLaser indicator
EStatus indicator
FOn/Standby (power) indicator
Projector status
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Lit blue
Status: Lit blue
Laser: Off
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Normal operation.
Power: Lit blue
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Off
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Warming up, shutting down, or cooling down.
When warming up, wait about 30 seconds for an image
to appear.
All buttons are disabled during warm-up, shutting
down, and cooling down.
Power: Lit blue
Status: Off
Laser: Off
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Standby, sleep mode, or monitoring.
When you press the power button, projection starts.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Off
Laser: Off
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Preparing for monitoring or quick startup mode. All
features are disabled.
Power: Indicator status
varies
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Flashing orange
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Filter: Indicator status
varies
Refresh Mode is in progress.
sManagement >Refresh Mode
Projector Indicator Status 224
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Laser: Indicator status
varies
Temp: Flashing orange
Filter: Indicator status
varies
Projector is too hot.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• Make sure the environmental temperature is not too
hot.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Off
Temp: Lit orange
Filter: Off
Projector has overheated and turned off. Leave it turned
off to cool down for 5 minutes.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Make sure the environmental temperature is not too
hot.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If operating the projector at high altitude, set the High
Altitude Mode setting to On in the projector's
Installation menu.
• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and
contact Epson for help.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Laser: Flashing orange
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Filter: Indicator status
varies
Laser warning.
Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for
help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Lit orange
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Laser has a problem.
Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for
help.
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Off
Temp: Flashing orange
Filter: Off
A fan or sensor has a problem.
Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for
help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Flashing orange
Temp: Off
Filter: Off
Internal projector error.
Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for
help.
Power: Indicator status
varies
Status: Indicator status
varies
Laser: Indicator status
varies
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Filter: Flashing orange
It is time to clean the air filter.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Laser: Indicator status
varies
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Filter: Lit orange
Low air flow through the air filter.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and
contact Epson for help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Laser: Off
Temp: Off
Filter: Lit orange
Low air flow through the projector.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and
contact Epson for help.
Projector Indicator Status 225
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Indicator status
varies
Status: Indicator status
varies
Laser: Flashing orange
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Filter: Indicator status
varies
The projector is unable to maintain constant brightness
and the setting is disabled.
sOperation >Light Source Brightness Control >
Maintain Brightness
Wireless LAN status
Wireless LAN indicator
status
Problem and solutions
Lit blue Wireless LAN is available or the projector is operating in
simple AP mode.
Flashing blue (quickly) Connecting to a device with infrastructure mode.
Flashing blue (slowly) An error has occurred. Turn off the projector and then
on again.
Off Wireless LAN is not available. Make sure the wireless
LAN settings are correct.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Cleaning the Air Filters and Intake Vents" p.214
• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.216
Viewing the Status Display 226
You can monitor the projector's status and view error information from the
status display.
aTurn on the projector.
bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
cSelect the Management setting and press [Enter].
dSelect Display Logs and press [Enter].
eSelect Display Status and press [Enter].
fPress the left or right arrow buttons to view different categories of
information.
•Status Information: The projector's operating status
•Source: Input signal information
•Signal Information: Input digital signal information
•Network Wired: Wired LAN settings
•Network Wireless: Wireless LAN settings
•Maintenance: Operating time for the projector and light source
•Version: The projector's firmware version
gg Related Links
• "Projector Status Display Messages" p.226
Projector Status Display Messages
Categories on the status display let you view information about the projector
and its operation.
aStatus messages are available only in English.
Status Information category
Information Description
System See the System status information table.
Source Displays the source currently being used.
On-ScreenDisplay Displays the settings for on-screen displays. When turned
off, menus or messages are not displayed on the projected
images.
A/V Mute Displays the A/V Mute status.
Intake Air Temp Displays the air intake temperature.
Internal Temp Lv Displays the projector's internal temperature.
Laser Status Displays the operating status of the light source.
Source category
Viewing the Status Display 227
Information Description
Source Displays the source currently being used.
Resolution Displays the resolution of the current input signal.
Color Space Displays the color space of the current input signal.
H-Frequency Displays the horizontal frequency of the current input
signal.
V-Frequency Displays the vertical frequency of the current input signal.
Sync Polarity Displays the sync polarity.
Sync Mode Displays the sync type.
Detected Mode Displays the detected mode of the current input signal.
Video Range Displays the video level of the projector.
Signal Information category
Information Description
5V Detect Displays the detection results of 5V signals.
TMDS Clock Displays the TMDS frequency of the current input signal.
H-Frequency Displays the horizontal frequency of the current input
signal.
V-Frequency Displays the vertical frequency of the current input signal.
Stable Time Displays the amount of operating time since the input
source was determined.
HDCP Status Displays the HDCP status.
HDCP Ver Displays the HDCP version.
AVI VIC Displays the VIC information (AVI) of the current input
signal.
AVI Checksum Displays the checksum result for AVI.
AVI Sampling Str Displays color sampling for AVI.
Signal Mode Displays the signal mode.
HDBaseT Level Displays the image signal information from the HDBaseT
port.
Network Wired category
Information Description
Projector Name Displays the name used to identify the projector when
connected to a network.
Connection Mode Displays the connection path for the LAN.
DHCP Displays the DHCP settings.
IP Display Displays the IP address display settings.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Network Wireless category
Information Description
Projector Name Displays the name used to identify the projector when
connected to a network.
Connection Mode Displays the connection mode to use when connecting the
projector and a computer over a wireless LAN.
SSID Displays the SSID.
DHCP Displays the DHCP settings.
IP Display Displays the IP address display settings.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Security Displays the security settings.
Antenna Level Displays the reception status for Wi-Fi.
Maintenance category
Information Description
Operation Time Displays the projector's total operation time.
Laser Op. Time Displays the laser operating time for each Light Source
Mode setting.
Viewing the Status Display 228
Version category
Information Description
Serial No. Displays the projector's serial number.
Main Display the projector's firmware version information.
HDBaseT
System status information
Status Description
OK The projector is in normal operating mode.
Warm-up The projector is warming up.
Standby The projector is in standby mode.
Cool Down The projector is cooling down.
Temp Error A high temperature error occurred.
Fan Error A fan error occurred.
Sensor Error A sensor error occurred.
Power Error A power error occurred.
Internal Error An internal error occurred.
Airflow Error A filter airflow error occurred.
Temp Warning A high temperature warning occurred.
Internal Warning A warning regarding the internal system occurred.
Airflow Decline A low airflow error occurred.
Power Warning A power warning occurred.
Clean Filter An air filter notice occurred; clean the air filter.
Laser Error A laser error has occurred.
Laser Warning A laser warning has occurred.
Temp Error FE A laser error has occurred because the laser temperature is
too high.
Status Description
Temp Warning FE A laser warning has occurred because the laser temperature
is too high.
Solving Image or Sound Problems 229
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems with projected
images or sound.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions When No Image Appears" p.229
• "Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears" p.229
• "Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears" p.230
• "Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears" p.230
• "Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular" p.231
• "Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static" p.231
• "Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry" p.232
• "Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect" p.233
• "Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the Projected Image" p.233
• "Solutions to Sound Problems" p.233
• "Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free"
p.234
• "Solutions When You Cannot Project Images Using the PC Free Feature"
p.234
Solutions When No Image Appears
If no image appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the projector or remote control to see if the
image was temporarily turned off.
• Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on
for the projector and connected video sources.
• Press the projector's power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode.
Also, check if the connected computer is in sleep mode or displaying a
blank screen saver.
• If the projector does not respond when you press the control panel buttons,
the buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in the Control
Panel Lock setting in the projector's Management menu or use the remote
control to turn on the projector.
• If the projector does not respond when you press any buttons on the
projector, an internal error may have occurred in the projector. Contact
Epson for help.
• To project an image source connected to the Computer2/Monitor Out port,
set the Monitor Out Port setting to Computer2 in the projector's Signal
I/O menu.
• Adjust the Brightness setting in the projector's Image menu for individual
image colors.
• Adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.
sOperation >Light Source Brightness Control
• Make sure the Messages setting is set to On in the projector's Display
menu.
• The projector may not be able to project copyrighted videos that you play
back on a computer. For more details, see the manual supplied with the
computer.
• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size
from full screen mode.
• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off
DirectX functions.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
• "Projector Display Settings - Display Menu" p.187
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.127
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
If the "No Signal" message appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the [Source Search] button and wait a few seconds for an image to
appear.
Solving Image or Sound Problems 230
• Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press play to begin
your presentation, if necessary.
• Check that all cables required for projection are securely connected.
• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to
display on an external monitor.
• If necessary, turn off the projector and the connected computer or video
source, and then turn them back on.
• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, replace the HDMI cable with
the shorter one.
gg Related Links
• "Displaying From a Windows Laptop" p.230
• "Displaying From a Mac Laptop" p.230
Displaying From a Windows Laptop
If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a laptop, you
need to set up the Windows laptop to display on an external monitor.
aHold down the Windows key and press Pon your keyboard at the same
time, then click Duplicate.
bIf the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check
the Windows Display utility to make sure the external monitor port is
enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled.
cIf necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display
option to Mirror or Duplicate.
Displaying From a Mac Laptop
If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a Mac laptop,
you need to set up the laptop for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual
for details.)
aOpen the System Preferences utility and select Displays.
bSelect the Display or Color LCD option, if necessary.
cClick the Arrange or Arrangement tab.
dSelect Mirror Displays.
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears
If the message "Not supported" is displayed, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected in the projector's Signal I/O
menu.
• Make sure the computer's display resolution does not exceed the projector's
resolution and frequency limits. If necessary, select a different display
resolution for your computer.
• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, change the HDMI IN EQ Level
setting in the projector's Signal I/O menu. After changing the setting, you
may need to restart the projector. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• If you are projecting using a thumb-sized media streaming device, set the
HDMI IN EQ Level setting to Auto in the projector's Signal I/O menu. If a
problem occurs, change the setting.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.250
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears
If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to optimize the image signal.
• Make sure you selected the correct Screen Type setting in the projector's
Installation menu for the screen you are using.
Solving Image or Sound Problems 231
If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected screen
frame, adjust the position of the image.
• Make sure the Scale setting is turned off in the projector's Image menu.
• Try adjusting the image position using the Position setting in the
projector's Image menu.
sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Position
If you have adjusted the image size using the Digital Zoom setting in the
projector's Installation menu, perform Image Shift to adjust the image
position (EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU).
sInstallation >Digital Zoom >Image Shift
• Try adjusting the image position using the Screen Position setting.
sInstallation >Screen Type >Screen Position
• Press the [Aspect] button on the remote control to select a different image
aspect ratio.
• Change the Resolution setting in the projector's Image menu according to
the signal for the connected equipment.
• Change the Blanking setting in the projector's Installation menu so that the
image appears as you expect.
• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the [E-Zoom] buttons, press
the [Esc] button until the projector returns to a full display
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the [E-Zoom] buttons, press
the [Default] button to return to the original image size
(EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U).
• Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the
resolution within the projector's limits.
• Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are
created for a different resolution.
• When projecting in Content Playback mode, make sure you are using the
appropriate Overlay Effect settings.
sOperation >Content Playback >Overlay Effect
• Make sure you selected the correct Projection setting in the projector's
Installation menu.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.185
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.250
• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position" p.50
• "Adding Effects to Your Projected Image" p.98
Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular
If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:
• Place the projector directly in front of the center of the screen, facing it
squarely, if possible.
• Adjust the H/V-Keystone setting to correct the image shape.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >H/V-Keystone
• Adjust the Quick Corner setting to correct the image shape.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Quick Corner
• Adjust the Arc Correction setting to correct the image shape projected on a
curved surface.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Arc Correction
• Adjust the Point Correction setting to correct slight distortion which
occurs partially.
sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Point Correction
gg Related Links
• "Correcting Image Shape with H/V Keystone" p.57
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.59
• "Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction" p.61
• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.63
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static
If the projected image contains electronic interference (noise) or static, try the
following solutions:
Solving Image or Sound Problems 232
• Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the
projector. They should be:
• Separated from the power cord to prevent interference
• Securely connected at both ends
• Not connected to an extension cable
• Adjust the Noise Reduction,MPEG Noise Reduction, and Deinterlacing
settings in the projector's Image menu.
sImage >Image Enhancement >Noise Reduction
sImage >Image Enhancement >MPEG Noise Reduction
sImage >Image Enhancement >Deinterlacing
• Set the Resolution setting to Auto in the projector's Image menu.
• Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with
the projector.
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the
Tracking and Sync. settings. If the images are not adjusted correctly,
manually adjust the Tracking and Sync. settings in the projector's Image
menu.
sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Tracking
sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Sync.
• If you adjusted the image shape using the projector controls, try decreasing
the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve image
quality.
• If you connected an extension power cable, try projecting without it to see if
it caused interference in the signal.
• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the
projector's Signal I/O menu, if available for your image source.
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.250
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry
If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:
• Display a test pattern and use it to adjust the image focus using the focus
ring.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen.
• Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it
distorts the image.
• Clean the projector lens.
aTo avoid condensation on the lens after bringing the projector in
from a cold environment, let the projector warm up to room
temperature before using it.
• Adjust the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve
image quality.
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the
Tracking and Sync. settings. If any bands or overall blurriness remain,
display a uniformly patterned image on the screen and manually adjust the
Tracking and Sync. settings.
sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Tracking
sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Sync.
• If you are projecting from a computer, use a lower resolution or select a
resolution that matches the projector's native resolution.
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.250
• "Focusing the Image Using the Focus Ring" p.69
Solving Image or Sound Problems 233
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are
Incorrect
If the projected image is too dark or light, or the colors are incorrect, try the
following solutions:
• Press the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to try different color
modes for the image and environment.
• Check your video source settings.
• Adjust the available settings in the projector's Image menu for the current
input source, such as Brightness,Contrast,Tint,Color Saturation, and
RGBCMY.
• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the
projector's Signal I/O menu, if available for your image source.
• Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your
video device. If you connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen.
• When using multiple projectors, make sure the Light Source Calibration
setting in the projector's Management menu is set to the same option on all
the projectors and that the projectors have been calibrated recently. If
certain projectors are not calibrated recently, the white balance and
brightness level may not match the other projectors.
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.180
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.74
Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the
Projected Image
If you see an afterimage in the projected image, use the Refresh Mode feature
to clear it. Select Refresh Mode >Start in the projector's Management menu.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
Solutions to Sound Problems
If there is no sound or the volume is too low or high, try the following
solutions:
• Adjust the projector's volume settings.
• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the projector or remote control to resume
video and audio if they were temporarily stopped.
• Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up
and the audio output is set for the correct source.
• Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video
source.
• Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled "No Resistance".
• Select the correct audio output port.
sSignal I/O >Audio Output
sSignal I/O >HDMI Audio Output
• If you want to output audio from a connected audio source when the
projector does not project any images, select these settings in the projector's
menus:
• Turn off Quick Startup in the Operation menu.
• Set the A/V Output setting to Always On in the Signal I/O menu.
• If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set the connected device to
PCM output.
• When you are connecting the projector to a Mac using an HDMI cable,
make sure your Mac supports audio through the HDMI port. If not, you
need to connect an audio cable.
• If the volume for the computer is set to the minimum while the projector is
set to the maximum, the noise may be mixed. Turn up the computer's
volume and turn down the projector's volume. (When you use Epson
iProjection (Windows/Mac).)
Solving Image or Sound Problems 234
gg Related Links
• "Projector Connections" p.30
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.183
• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.84
Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed
Correctly in PC Free
If any file names are longer than the display area or include unsupported
symbols, the file names are shortened or changed in PC Free. Shorten or
change the file name.
Solutions When You Cannot Project Images Using the
PC Free Feature
If you cannot project images using the PC Free feature, try the following
solutions:
• If you are using a USB device with a slow transfer speed, you may not be
able to project movies correctly.
• You cannot play movies saved with a movie codec other than H.264 and
H.265. (H.265 only supports Main Profile.)
• You cannot play audio saved with an audio codec other than LPCM and
AAC-LC.
gg Related Links
• "Supported PC Free File Types" p.89
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems 235
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems operating the
projector or remote control.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems" p.235
• "Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control" p.235
• "Solutions to Password Problems" p.236
• "Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running
Low" Message Appears" p.236
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems
If the projector does not turn on when you press the power button or it turns
off unexpectedly, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a
working electrical outlet.
• If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector,
check its batteries and make sure at least one of the remote receivers are
available in the Remote Receiver setting in the projector's Installation
menu.
• The projector's buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in
the Control Panel Lock setting in the projector's Management menu or use
the remote control to turn on the projector.
• If the projector's light source turns off unexpectedly, it may have entered
sleep mode after a period of inactivity. Perform any operation to wake the
projector. To turn off sleep mode, set the Sleep Mode setting to Off in the
projector's Operation menu.
• If the projector's light source turns off unexpectedly, the A/V mute timer
may be enabled. Set the A/V Mute Timer setting to Off in the projector's
Operation menu.
• If the projector's light source turns off, the status indicator is flashing, and
the temp (temperature) indicator is lit, the projector has overheated and
turned off.
• The cooling fans may run in standby status depending on the projector
settings. Also, when the projector wakes from standby status, the fans may
cause an unexpected noise. This is not a malfunction.
• The power cord may be defective. Disconnect the cord and contact Epson
for help.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.185
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.127
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control
If the projector does not respond to remote control commands, try the
following solutions:
• Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have
power. If necessary, replace the batteries.
• Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle
and range of the projector.
• Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.
• Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to
enter sleep mode. Release the button to wake the remote control up.
• Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be
interfering with the projector's remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the
projector away from the sun or interfering equipment.
• Make sure at least one of the remote receivers are available in the Remote
Receiver setting in the projector's Installation menu.
• If the Remote Receiver setting is disabled, hold down the [Menu] button on
the remote control for at least 15 seconds to reset the setting to its default.
• If you assigned an ID number to the projector to operate multiple projectors
from the remote control, you may need to check or change the ID setting.
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems 236
• Press the 0 (zero) button on the remote control while holding down the
[ID] button. By selecting 0 on the remote control, you can operate all of the
projectors regardless of the projector ID settings.
• If you lose the remote control, you can order another one from Epson.
gg Related Links
• "Remote Control Operation" p.40
• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.185
• "Installing Batteries in the Remote Control" p.39
• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.114
Solutions to Password Problems
If you cannot enter or remember a password, try the following solutions:
• You may have turned on password protection without first setting a
password. Try entering 0000 using the remote control.
• If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a
message displaying a request code, write down the code and contact Epson
for help. Provide the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in
unlocking the projector.
• If you set an Epson Web Control password and forgot the user ID or
password, try entering the following:
• User ID: EPSONWEB
• Default password: admin
• If you set a Remote password (in Epson Web Control) and forgot the user
ID or password, try entering the following:
• User ID: EPSONREMOTE
• Default password: guest
• If you lose the remote control you cannot enter a password. Order a new
one from Epson.
Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock
Settings is Running Low" Message Appears
If the message "The battery that saves your clock settings is running low." is
displayed, contact Epson for help.
Solving Network Problems 237
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the projector
on a network.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails" p.237
• "Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web" p.237
• "Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received" p.237
• "Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection"
p.238
• "Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring" p.238
• "Solutions When You Cannot Use Two Screen Mirroring Sources" p.238
• "Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen
Mirroring Connection" p.239
• "Solutions When You Cannot Receive Shared Images" p.239
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails
If you are having trouble with the authentication, try the following solutions:
• If the wireless settings are correct, but authentication fails, you may need to
update the Date & Time settings in the projector's Management menu.
• Check the Security settings in the projector's Network menu.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >Security
• If the access point security is WPA3-EAP, change the access point setting to
WPA2/WPA3-EAP.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.192
• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.197
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector
Through the Web
If you are unable to access the projector through a Web browser, make sure
you are using the correct ID and password.
• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
• For the password, enter the password set in the projector's Network menu.
The default password is admin.
• For the infrastructure mode, make sure you have access to the network the
projector is on.
• If your Web browser is set up to connect via a proxy server, the Epson Web
Control screen cannot be displayed. Make settings for a connection without
using a proxy server.
• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the
projector's Operation menu, make sure the network device is turned on.
After turning on the network device, turn on the projector. If you are
connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a wireless network access
point.
aThe user ID and password are case sensitive.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.196
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not
Received
If you do not receive an e-mail alerting you to problems with a projector over
the network, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network
correctly. (If an error shuts down the projector, the email may not be
delivered.)
• Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly in the
projector's network Mail Notification menu or in the network software.
Solving Network Problems 238
• Set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's
Operation menu so that the network software can monitor the projector in
standby mode.
Change the Port setting according to your network environment. If you are
connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a wireless network access
point.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu" p.200
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
Solutions When the Image Contains Static During
Network Projection
If the projected image contains static during network projection, try the
following solutions:
• Check for any obstacles between the access point, the computer, the mobile
device, and the projector, and change their positions to improve
communication.
• Make sure that the access point, the computer, the mobile device and the
projector are not too far apart. Move them closer together and try to
connect again.
• Check for interference from other equipment, such as a Bluetooth device or
microwave. Move the interfering device farther away or expand your
wireless bandwidth.
• Reduce the number of connected devices if the connection speed declines.
Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen
Mirroring
If you are unable to connect to the projector using Screen Mirroring, try the
following solutions:
• Check the projector's settings.
• Set the Simple AP setting to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Simple AP
• Set the Screen Mirroring setting to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen
Mirroring
• Select the Screen Mirroring setting to Off and select On again.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen
Mirroring
• Check the mobile device's settings.
• Make sure the settings on the mobile device are correct.
• When connecting again immediately after disconnecting, it may take
some time until the connection is established. Reconnect after waiting for
a while.
• Restart the mobile device.
• Once you have connected using Screen Mirroring, the projector
connection information may be recorded on the mobile device. However,
you may not be able to reconnect to the projector from the recorded
information. Select the projector from the list of available devices.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.196
• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.201
Solutions When You Cannot Use Two Screen
Mirroring Sources
If you are unable to use two Screen Mirroring sources at the same time, set
the Interrupt Connection setting to Off.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Mirroring
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.201
Solving Network Problems 239
Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static
During Screen Mirroring Connection
If the projected image or sound contains static when connecting using Screen
Mirroring, try the following solutions:
• Avoid covering the Wi-Fi antenna of the mobile device.
• If you use a Screen Mirroring connection and an internet connection at the
same time, the image may stop or contain noise. Disconnect the internet
connection to expand your wireless bandwidth and improve the connection
speed of the mobile device.
• Make sure the projection contents meet the Screen Mirroring requirements.
• Depending on the settings of the mobile device, the connection may be lost
when the device enters power saving mode. Check the electrical power
saving settings on the mobile device.
• Update to the latest version of the wireless driver or firmware on the mobile
device.
Solutions When You Cannot Receive Shared Images
If you cannot receive shared images from other projectors, try the following
solutions:
• Connect the projector to the same network as the projector that is sharing
images.
• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.
sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing
• Make sure that no other device is connecting to the projector using the
Epson iProjection software.
• If the firmware version amongst the projectors sharing the screen is not the
same, you may need to update the projector's firmware to share your screen.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.201
Solutions to Problems in Content Playback Mode 240
If you cannot play back a playlist correctly, try the following solutions:
• Make sure Content Playback is set to On.
sOperation >Content Playback
• Make sure the USB flash drive contains a playlist.
• Make sure the USB flash drive is directly connected to the projector. Do not
use a multi-card reader or a USB hub to expand a USB port.
• If the USB flash drive is partitioned, you may not be able to play back
playlists. Delete all of the partitions before saving the playlists on the USB
flash drive.
• Do not share a playlist between projectors that are different in resolution.
Color and shape effects added by using Overlay Effect may not be
reproduced correctly.
sOperation >Content Playback >Overlay Effect
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.189
Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function 241
If you cannot operate the connected devices using the HDMI Link features,
try the following solutions:
• Set the HDMI Out Setting setting to Pass Through in the projector's
Multi-Projection menu
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U).
• Make sure the cable meets the HDMI CEC standard.
• Make sure the connected device meets the HDMI CEC standard. See the
documentation supplied with the device for more information.
• Check that all cables required for HDMI Link are securely connected.
• Make sure the connected devices are turned on and in standby status. See
the documentation supplied with the device for more information.
• If you connected a speaker, set it to PCM output.
• If you connect a new device or change the connection, set the CEC function
for the connected device again and restart the device.
• Do not connect 4 or more multi-media players. You can connect up to 3
multi-media players that meet the HDMI CEC standard at the same time.
• If the device does not appear in the Device Connections list, it does not
meet the HDMI CEC standards. Connect a different device.
gg Related Links
• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.203
Appendix
Check these sections for the technical specifications and important notices about your product.
gg Related Links
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.243
• "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.245
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.250
• "Projector Specifications" p.254
• "External Dimensions" p.256
• "Supported Features for Epson Projector Content Manager" p.257
• "Supported Features for the Epson Projector Professional Tool" p.258
• "List of Safety Symbols and Instructions" p.259
• "Laser Safety Information" p.261
• "Glossary" p.263
• "Notices" p.265
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts 243
The following optional accessories and replacement parts are available. Please
purchase these products as and when needed.
The following list of optional accessories and replacement parts is current as
of: February 2021.
Details of accessories are subject to change without notice and availability
may vary depending on the country of purchase.
gg Related Links
• "Screens" p.243
• "Cables" p.243
• "Mounts" p.243
• "For Wireless Connection" p.243
• "External Devices" p.243
• "Replacement Parts" p.244
Screens
80" Mobile X-Type Screen ELPSC21
Portable X-type screens. (aspect ratio 16:9)
Multi Aspect Screen ELPSC26
Portable multi-aspect screen.
Cables
Computer cable ELPKC02 (1.8 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC09 (3 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC10 (20 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Use when connecting to the Computer port.
Mounts
Ceiling mount ELPMB22
Ceiling mount (Low profile) ELPMB30
Use when installing the projector on a ceiling.
Safety Wire Set ELPWR01
Use when connecting the projector to the installation mount to prevent the
projector from falling down.
Ceiling pipe (450 mm) ELPFP13
Ceiling pipe (700 mm) ELPFP14
Use when installing the projector on a high ceiling.
aSpecial expertise is required to suspend the projector from a ceiling.
Contact Epson for help.
For Wireless Connection
Wireless LAN module ELPAP11
Use this to project images from a computer via a wireless communication.
Wireless Presentation System ELPWP10
Use when directly connecting to Windows/Mac computers and projecting
images wirelessly. Includes two wireless transmitters (ELPWT01) and one
wireless LAN module (ELPAP11).
Wireless Transmitter ELPWT01
Additional wireless transmitter for wireless presentation system.
External Devices
Document Camera ELPDC21
Document Camera ELPDC13
Document Camera ELPDC07
Use when projecting image such as books, OHP documents, or slides.
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts 244
External Speaker ELPSP02
External self‑powered speaker.
HDBaseT Transmitter ELPHD01
Use when sending an HDMI signal over a long distance. (HDCP 2.2 is not
supported)
Android TV™device ELPAP12
(EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU/EB‑‑L630U/EB‑‑L530U)
Use this streaming media player to watch online content.
Replacement Parts
Air filter ELPAF56
Use as a replacement for used air filters.
Screen Size and Projection Distance 245
Check the tables in these sections to determine how far to place the projector
from the screen based on the size of the projected image.
gg Related Links
• "EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U" p.245
• "EB‑L720U/EB‑L520U" p.248
EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU/EB‑‑L630U
/EB‑‑L530U
AProjection distance (cm)
BDistance from the center of the lens to the base of the screen (This changes
depending on the setting for vertical lens shift.) (cm)
CCenter of lens
WUXGA (EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L630U/EB‑‑L530U)
16:10 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108 × 67 144 - 235 -67 - 0
60" 129 × 81 174 - 283 -81 - 0
70" 151 × 94 204 - 331 -94 - 0
80" 172 × 108 233 - 378 -108 - 0
100" 215 × 135 292 - 474 -135 - 0
120" 258 × 162 351 - 569 -162 - 0
150" 323 × 202 440 - 713 -202 - 0
200" 431 × 269 588 - 951 -269 - 0
300" 646 × 404 884 - 1429 -404 - 0
500" 1077 × 673 1476 - 2384 -673 - 0
4:3 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
45" 91 × 69 147 - 240 -69 - 0
50" 102 × 76 164 - 267 -76 - 0
60" 122 × 91 197 - 321 -91 - 0
80" 163 × 122 264 - 429 -122 - 0
100" 203 × 152 331 - 537 -152 - 0
110" 224 × 168 365 - 591 -168 - 0
120" 244 × 183 398 - 645 -183 - 0
150" 305 × 229 499 - 807 -229 - 0
200" 406 × 305 666 - 1077 -305 - 0
Screen Size and Projection Distance 246
4:3 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
300" 610 × 457 1001 - 1618 -457 - 0
440" 894 × 671 1470 - 2375 -671 - 0
16:9 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108 × 61 145 - 237 -64 - 3
50" 111 × 62 148 - 242 -66 - 3
60" 133 × 75 179 - 291 -79 - 4
80" 177 × 100 240 - 389 -105 - 6
100" 221 × 125 301 - 487 -131 - 7
110" 244 × 137 331 - 536 -145 - 8
120" 266 × 149 361 - 585 -158 - 8
150" 332 × 187 453 - 733 -197 - 10
200" 443 × 249 605 - 978 -263 - 14
300" 664 × 374 909 - 1469 -394 - 21
480" 1063 × 598 1456 - 2352 -631 - 33
16:6 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
46" 109 × 41 147 - 239 -55 - 14
50" 119 × 45 160 - 260 -59 - 15
60" 143 × 54 192 - 313 -71 - 18
70" 166 × 62 225 - 366 -83 - 21
80" 190 × 71 258 - 418 -95 - 24
16:6 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
100" 238 × 89 323 - 524 -119 - 30
120" 285 × 107 388 - 629 -143 - 36
150" 357 × 134 486 - 787 -178 - 45
200" 476 × 178 650 - 1051 -238 - 59
300" 713 × 268 976 - 1578 -357 - 89
452" 1075 × 403 1473 - 2379 -537 - 134
WUXGA (EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU)
16:10 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele) *
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
50" 108 × 67 85 - 115 -67 - 0
60" 129 × 81 103 - 139 -81 - 0
80" 172 × 108 138 - 186 -108 - 0
90" 194 × 121 156 - 210 -121 - 0
100" 215 × 135 173 - 234 -135 - 0
148" 319 × 199 258 - 348 -199 - 0
150" 323 × 202 261** -202 - 0
180" 388 × 242 314** -242 - 0
200" 431 × 269 349** -269 - 0
4:3 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele) *
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
45" 91 × 69 87 - 117 -69 - 0
50" 102 × 76 97 - 131 -76 - 0
Screen Size and Projection Distance 247
4:3 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele) *
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
60" 122 × 91 117 - 157 -91 - 0
80" 163 × 122 157 - 211 -122 - 0
90" 183 × 137 176 - 238 -137 - 0
100" 203 × 152 196 - 265 -152 - 0
120" 244 × 183 236 - 319 -183 - 0
130" 264 × 198 256 - 346 -198 - 0
150" 305 × 229 296** -229 - 0
176" 358 × 268 348** -268 - 0
16:9 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele) *
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
49" 108 × 61 86 - 116 -64 - 3
50" 111 × 62 88 - 118 -66 - 3
60" 133 × 75 106 - 143 -79 - 4
80" 177 × 100 142 - 191 -105 - 6
100" 221 × 125 178 - 240 -131 - 7
120" 266 × 149 214 - 289 -158 - 8
144" 319 × 179 258 - 348 -189 - 10
150" 332 × 187 269** -197 - 10
180" 398 × 224 323** -237 - 12
194" 429 × 242 348** -255 - 13
16:6 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele) *
Vertical Lens Shift
Bottom to Top
46" 109 × 41 86 - 117 -55 - 14
50" 119 × 45 94 - 127 -59 - 15
60" 143 × 54 114 - 153 -71 - 18
80" 190 × 71 153 - 206 -95 - 24
100" 238 × 89 191 - 259 -119 - 30
120" 285 × 107 230 - 311 -143 - 36
134" 319 × 120 258 - 348 -159 - 40
150" 357 × 134 289** -178 - 45
180" 428 × 161 347** -214 - 54
181" 430 × 161 349** -215 - 54
* Maximum (Tele): Digital zoom
** Project using Wide (maximum zoom).
Screen Size and Projection Distance 248
EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L520U
AProjection distance (cm)
BDistance from the center of the lens to the base of the screen (or to the top of
the screen, if suspended from a ceiling) (cm)
CCenter of lens
WUXGA
16:10 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
50" 108 × 67 144 - 235 -2
60" 129 × 81 174 - 283 -3
16:10 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
70" 151 × 94 204 - 331 -3
80" 172 × 108 233 - 378 -4
100" 215 × 135 292 - 474 -5
120" 258 × 162 351 - 569 -6
150" 323 × 202 440 - 713 -7
200" 431 × 269 588 - 951 -10
300" 646 × 404 884 - 1429 -14
500" 1077 × 673 1476 - 2384 -24
4:3 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
45" 91 × 69 147 - 240 -2
50" 102 × 76 164 - 267 -3
60" 122 × 91 197 - 321 -3
70" 142 × 107 231 - 375 -4
80" 163 × 122 264 - 429 -4
100" 203 × 152 331 - 537 -5
120" 244 × 183 398 - 645 -7
150" 305 × 229 499 - 807 -8
200" 406 × 305 666 - 1077 -11
300" 610 × 457 1001 - 1618 -16
440" 894 × 671 1470 - 2375 -24
Screen Size and Projection Distance 249
16:9 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
49" 108 × 61 145 - 237 1
50" 111 × 62 148 - 242 1
60" 133 × 75 179 - 291 1
70" 155 × 87 209 - 340 1
80" 177 × 100 240 - 389 2
100" 221 × 125 301 - 487 2
120" 266 × 149 361 - 585 2
150" 332 × 187 453 - 733 3
200" 443 × 249 605 - 978 4
300" 664 × 374 909 - 1469 6
486" 1076 × 605 1474 - 2381 9
16:6 screen size A B
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
46" 109 × 41 147 - 239 11
50" 119 × 45 160 - 260 12
60" 143 × 54 192 - 313 15
70" 166 × 62 225 - 366 17
80" 190 × 71 258 - 418 20
100" 238 × 89 323 - 524 24
120" 285 × 107 388 - 629 29
150" 357 × 134 486 - 787 37
200" 476 × 178 650 - 1051 49
300" 713 × 268 976 - 1578 73
452" 1075 × 403 1473 - 2379 110
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 250
The table here lists the compatible refresh rate and resolution for each
compatible video display format.
aThe Computer port source does not support YCbCr signals.
PC
Compatible Mode
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
VGA60 640 480 60 ✓ ✓
VGA72 640 480 72 ✓
VGA75 640 480 75 ✓
VGA85 640 480 85 ✓
SVGA60 800 600 60 ✓ ✓
SVGA72 800 600 72 ✓
SVGA75 800 600 75 ✓
SVGA85 800 600 85 ✓
XGA60 1024 768 60 ✓ ✓
XGA70 1024 768 70 ✓
XGA75 1024 768 75 ✓
XGA85 1024 768 85 ✓
WXGA60-1 1280 768 60 ✓
WXGA60 1280 800 60 ✓ ✓
WXGA75 1280 800 75 ✓
WXGA85 1280 800 85 ✓
WXGA60-3 1366 768 60 ✓ ✓
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
WXGA+60 1440 900 60 ✓ ✓
WXGA+75 1440 900 75 ✓
WXGA+85 1440 900 85 ✓
WXGA++ 1600 900 60 ✓ ✓
SXGA1_70 1152 864 70 ✓
SXGA1_75 1152 864 75 ✓
SXGA1_85 1152 864 85 ✓
SXGA2_60 1280 960 60 ✓ ✓
SXGA2_75 1280 960 75 ✓
SXGA2_85 1280 960 85 ✓
SXGA3_60 1280 1024 60 ✓ ✓
SXGA3_75 1280 1024 75 ✓
SXGA3_85 1280 1024 85 ✓
SXGA+60 1400 1050 60 ✓ ✓
SXGA+75 1400 1050 75 ✓
WSXGA+60 1680 1050 60 ✓* ✓
UXGA60 1600 1200 60 ✓ ✓
1920×1080_50 1920 1080 50 ✓ ✓
1920×1080_60 1920 1080 60 ✓ ✓
WUXGA60
(Reduced
Blanking)
1920 1200 60 ✓ ✓
QXGA 2048 1536 60 ✓
WQHD 2560 1440 60 ✓
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 251
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
WQXGA
(Reduced
Blanking)
2560 1600 60 ✓
* Only compatible when Wide is selected as the Resolution setting in the
projector's Image menu.
Unique Aspect
Compatible Mode
Mode
HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB YCbCr
4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0
8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12
Unique aspect (16:6) ✓
Mode Information
Mode Resolution
(dot)
H Sync
(KHz)
Refresh
Rate (Hz)
Dotclk
(MHz) Scan Type
Unique aspect
(16:6) 1920 720 45.96 60 95.045 Progressive
If the image is not projected correctly, set the timing settings on your
computer to match the values in the following tables. (You may not be able to
change these settings, depending on your computer.)
Mode Dotclk
(MHz)
H Freq
(KHz)
V Freq
(Hz)
H
active
(dot)
H
Front
Porch
(dot)
H Sync
Width
(dot)
H Back
Porch
(dot)
Unique aspect
(16:6) 95.045 45.96 60 1920 42 32 74
Mode
V
active
(Line)
V Front
Porch
(Line)
V Sync
Width
(Line)
V Back
Porch
(Line)
H Sync
Polarity
V Sync
Polarity
Scan
Type
Unique aspect
(16:6) 720 20 8 18 P N Progres
sive
P: Positive
N: Negative
SD
Compatible Mode
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
SDTV (480i) 720 480 59.94 ✓ ✓ ✓
SDTV (576i) 720 576 50 ✓ ✓ ✓
SDTV (480p) 720 480 59.94 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SDTV (576p) 720 576 50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HD
Compatible Mode
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 252
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
HDTV
(720p)_50 1280 720 50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(720p)_59.94 1280 720 59.94 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(720p)_60 1280 720 60 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080i)_50 1920 1080 50 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080i)_59.94 1920 1080 59.94 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080i)_60 1920 1080 60 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_23.98 1920 1080 23.98 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_24 1920 1080 24 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_29.97 1920 1080 29.97 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_30 1920 1080 30 ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_50 1920 1080 50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_59.94 1920 1080 59.94 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HDTV
(1080p)_60 1920 1080 60 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
Compatible Mode
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 23.98 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 24 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 25 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 29.97 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 30 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 50 ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 59.94 ✓
4K
(3840×2160) 3840 2160 60 ✓
4K
(4096×2160)
(SMPTE)
4096 2160 23.98 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(4096×2160)
(SMPTE)
4096 2160 24 ✓ ✓ ✓
4K
(4096×2160)
(SMPTE)
4096 2160 50 ✓
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 253
Mode Resolution
(dot)
Refresh
Rate
(Hz)
Comp
uter HDMI/HDBaseT
RGB
HV
YCbCr(8bit) RGB
(8bit)
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:4:4
4K
(4096×2160)
(SMPTE)
4096 2160 59.94 ✓
4K
(4096×2160)
(SMPTE)
4096 2160 60 ✓
Projector Specifications 254
Product name EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630S
U/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U/EB‑L520U
Dimensions 440 (W) × 122 (H) × 304 (D) mm (not including raised
section)
LCD panel size 0.67"
Display method Poly-silicon TFT active matrix
Resolution 2,304,000 pixels
WUXGA (1,920 (W) × 1,200 (H) dots) × 3
Focus adjustment Manual
Zoom adjustment EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L630U/EB‑‑L530U
/EB‑‑L520U:
1.0 to 1.6 (Optical Zoom)
EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU:
1.0 to 1.35 (Digital zoom)
Lens Shift EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU/EB‑‑L63
0U/EB‑‑L530U:
Manual
Maximum vertical direction: Approx. ±50%
Maximum horizontal direction: Approx. ±20%
Light source Laser diode
Light source output power EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630
SU/EB‑‑L630U:
Up to 115.5 W
EB‑‑L530U/EB‑‑L520U:
Up to 44 W
Wavelength 449 to 461 nm
Laser class Class 4
Light source operation
time *
Normal or Quiet Light Source Mode: Up to about
20,000 hours
Extended Light Source Mode: Up to about 30,000 hours
Max. audio output 10 W
Speaker 1
Power supply EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630
SU/EB‑‑L630U:
100-240V AC±10% 50/60Hz 3.6 - 1.6 A
EB‑‑L530U/EB‑‑L520U:
100-240V AC±10% 50/60Hz 3.1 - 1.4 A
Operating power
consumption (100 to 120
V area)
EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630
SU/EB‑‑L630U:
358 W
EB‑‑L530U/EB‑‑L520U:
301 W
Operating power
consumption (220 to 240
V area)
EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L720U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630
SU/EB‑‑L630U:
345 W
EB‑‑L530U/EB‑‑L520U:
293 W
Standby power
consumption
Communication On: 2.0 W
Communication Off: 0.3 W
Operating altitude Altitude 0 to 3,048 m
Operating temperature
(when using a single
projector installation) **
Altitude of 0 to 2,286 m: 0 to +45°C (Humidity of 20 to
80%, No condensation)
Altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m: 0 to +40°C (Humidity of
20 to 80%, No condensation)
Operating temperature
(when using a multiple
projector installation) **
Altitude of 0 to 2,286 m: 0 to +40°C (Humidity of 20 to
80%, No condensation)
Altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m: 0 to +35°C (Humidity of
20 to 80%, No condensation)
Storage temperature -10 to +60°C (No condensation)
Projector Specifications 255
Mass EB‑‑L735U/EB‑‑L730U/EB‑‑L635SU/EB‑‑L630SU/EB‑‑L63
0U:
Approx. 8.4kg
EB‑‑L720U:
Approx. 7.8kg
EB‑‑L530U:
Approx. 8.2kg
EB‑‑L520U:
Approx. 7.7kg
* Approximate time until the light source brightness decreases to half of its
original value. (Assuming the projector is being used in an environment
containing airborne particles of 0.04 to 0.2 mg/m3. This is an approximate
guide only and may change depending on the projector’s usage and
surroundings.)
** Light source brightness automatically dims if the surrounding temperature
gets too high. (Approximately 35°C at an altitude of 0 to 2,286 m, and
approximately 30°C at an altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m; however, this may vary
depending on the surrounding environment.)
This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-
phase voltage 230V.
gg Related Links
• "Connector Specifications" p.255
Connector Specifications
Computer1 port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)
Computer2/Monitor Out port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)
Audio1 port 1 Stereo mini pin jack
Audio2 port 1 Stereo mini pin jack
Audio Out port 1 Stereo mini pin jack
HDMI1 port 1 HDMI (Audio is only supported by
PCM)
HDMI2 port 1 HDMI (Audio is only supported by
PCM)
HDMI Out port
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/
EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U)
1 HDMI
USB-A port 1 USB connector (Type A)
DC Out port (for power supply)
(EB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L635SU/
EB‑L630SU/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U)
1 USB connector (Type A)
Service port 1 USB connector (Type B)
LAN port 1 RJ-45
HDBaseT port 1 RJ-45
RS-232C port 1 Mini D-Sub 9-pin (male)
a• USB-A and USB-B port supports USB 2.0. However, USB ports are
not guaranteed to operate all devices that support USB.
• USB-B port does not support USB 1.1.
External Dimensions 256
ACenter of lens
BDistance from center of lens to suspension bracket fixing point: 74 mm
CEB‑L735U/EB‑L730U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L630U/EB‑L530U/EB‑L520U: 339 mm
EB‑L635SU/EB‑L630SU: 334 mm
The unit in these illustrations is mm.
Supported Features for Epson Projector Content Manager 257
Your projector supports the following features and options of the Epson
Projector Content Manager software.
Features/Options EB‑L735U/EB‑L730
U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L6
35SU/EB‑L630SU/E
B‑L630U/EB‑L530U
/EB‑L520U
Simultaneous playback -
Save the playlist to the projector via a network ✓
Settings >Video Format Auto Select ✓
AVI Format ✓
MP4 Format ✓
Supported Features for the Epson Projector Professional Tool 258
Your projector supports the following features and options for the Epson
Projector Professional Tool software.
a• The Epson Projector Professional Tool software does not support
multiple projector connected in a chain using HDMI Out Setting in
the projector's Multi-Projection menu and the HDMI Out ports.
• If you change the Screen Type and Screen Position settings, the
Geometry Correction settings are reset.
• If you want to turn on the projector through the HDBaseT
transmitter, set the A/V Output setting to Always On in the
projector's Signal I/O menu.
Features/Options EB‑L735U/EB‑L730
U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L6
35SU/EB‑L630SU/E
B‑L630U/EB‑L530U
/EB‑L520U
Camera Assist
features -
Layout/Monitorin
gtab
Input Voltage -
Setting tab Lens Control tab -
Initial Setting >
Basic 3 tab
Startup
(Shutter)/Standby
(Shutter)
-
Fade-in
(seconds)/Fade-out
(seconds)
-
Shutter Timer You can set this as
the projector's A/V
Mute Timer
setting.
Standby
Confirmation -
Features/Options EB‑L735U/EB‑L730
U/EB‑L720U/EB‑L6
35SU/EB‑L630SU/E
B‑L630U/EB‑L530U
/EB‑L520U
Reset All Config The following
settings are also
reset:
•Color
Uniformity
•Color Matching
Reset Screen
Matching
Only the following
settings are reset:
•Color
Uniformity
•Color Matching
Geometry
Correction tab
Curved Surface -
Corner Wall -
Marker display
when dragging and
dropping a point
-
Adjustments
outside the
projection area
-
An absolute
coordinate value
and a relative
coordinate value
✓
General menu Geometry
Correction File -
Projector File -
List of Safety Symbols and Instructions 259
The following table lists the meaning of the safety symbols labeled on the
equipment.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
AIEC60417
No. 5007
"ON" (power)
To indicate connection to the mains.
BIEC60417
No. 5008
"OFF" (power)
To indicate disconnection from the
mains.
CIEC60417
No. 5009
Stand-by
To identify the switch or switch
position by means of which part of the
equipment is switched on in order to
bring it into the stand-by condition.
DISO7000
No. 0434B,
IEC3864-B3.1
Caution
To identify general caution when
using the product.
EIEC60417
No. 5041
Caution, hot surface
To indicate that the marked item can
be hot and should not be touched
without taking care.
FIEC60417
No. 6042
ISO3864-B3.6
Caution, risk of electric shock
To identify equipment that has risk of
electric shock.
GIEC60417
No. 5957
For indoor use only
To identify electrical equipment
designed primarily for indoor use.
HIEC60417
No. 5926
Polarity of d.c. power connector
To identify the positive and negative
connections (the polarity) on a piece
of equipment to which a d.c. power
supply may be connected.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
I— The same as No. 8.
JIEC60417
No. 5001B
Battery, general
On battery powered equipment. To
identify a device for instance a cover
for the battery compartment, or the
connector terminals.
KIEC60417
No. 5002
Positioning of cell
To identify the battery holder itself
and to identify the positioning of the
cell(s) inside the battery holder.
L— The same as No. 11.
MIEC60417
No. 5019
Protective earth
To identify any terminal which is
intended for connection to an external
conductor for protection against
electric shock in case of a fault, or the
terminal of a protective earth
electrode.
NIEC60417
No. 5017
Earth
To identify an earth (ground) terminal
in cases where neither the symbol No.
13 is explicitly required.
OIEC60417
No. 5032
Alternating current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for alternating
current only; to identify relevant
terminals.
PIEC60417
No. 5031
Direct current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for direct
current only; to identify relevant
terminals.
List of Safety Symbols and Instructions 260
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
QIEC60417
No. 5172
Class II equipment
To identify equipment meeting the
safety requirements specified for Class
II equipment according to IEC 61140.
RISO 3864 General prohibition
To identify actions or operations that
are prohibited.
SISO 3864 Contact prohibition
To indicate injury that could occur
due to touching a specific part of the
equipment.
T— Never look into the optical lens while
the projector is on.
U— To indicate that the marked item don’t
place anything on projector.
VISO3864
IEC60825-1
Caution, laser radiation
To indicate the equipment has a laser
radiation part.
WISO 3864 Disassembly prohibition
To indicate a risk of injury, such as
electric shock, if the equipment is
disassembled.
XIEC60417
No. 5266
Standby, partial standby
To indicate that part of the equipment
is in the ready status.
YISO3864
IEC60417
No. 5057
Caution, movable parts
To indicate that you must keep away
from movable parts according to
protection standards.
ZIEC60417
No. 6056
Caution (Moving Fan Blades)
As a safety precaution, stay away from
the moving fan blades.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
aIEC60417
No. 6043
Caution (Sharp Corners)
To indicate sharp corners that should
not be touched.
b— To indicate that looking into the lens
while projecting is prohibited.
cISO7010
No. W027
ISO 3864
Warning, Optical radiation (such as
UV, visible radiation, IR)
Taking care to avoid injury to eyes and
skin when in the vicinity of optical
radiation.
dIEC60417
No. 5109
Not to be used in residential areas.
To identify electrical equipment which
is not suitable for a residential area.
Laser Safety Information 261
This projector is a Class 1 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-
1:2014 international standard for lasers.
Follow these safety instructions when using the projector.
Warning
• Do not open the projector's case. The projector contains a high-powered laser.
• Possibly hazardous optical radiation emitted from this product. Do not look at
operating light source. Eye injury may result.
Caution
Do not disassemble the projector when disposing of it. Dispose according to your
local or national laws and regulations.
aThe projector uses a laser as the light source. The laser has the
following characteristics.
• Depending on the surroundings, the brightness of the light source
may decline. The brightness declines a lot when the temperature gets
too high.
• The brightness of the light source declines the longer it is used. You
can change the relationship between usage time and decline in
brightness settings.
gg Related Links
• "Laser Warning Labels" p.261
Laser Warning Labels
Laser warning labels are attached on the projector.
Inside
Top
As with any bright source, do not stare into the beam, RG2 IEC/EN 62471-
5:2015.
Laser Safety Information 262
• Never look into the projector lens when the laser is on. This can damage
your eyes and is especially dangerous for children and pets.
• When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make
sure no one is looking into the lens.
• Do not allow small children to operate the projector. Children must be
accompanied by an adult.
• Do not look into the lens during projection. Also, do not look into the lens
using optical devices, such as a magnifying glass or telescope. This could
cause visual impairment.
For North/South America
Warning
MOUNT ABOVE THE HEADS OF CHILDREN. The use of a ceiling mount is
recommended with this product to place it above the eyes of children.
Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for
conformance as a Risk Group 2 LIP as defined in IEC 62471-5: Ed. 1.0. For
more information see Laser Notice No. 57, dated May 8, 2019.
Glossary 263
This section briefly explains the difficult terms that are not explained in the
text of this guide. For details, refer to other commercially available
publications.
AMX Device
Discovery
AMX Device Discovery is a technology developed by AMX to
facilitate AMX control systems for easy operation of the target
equipment.
Epson have implemented this protocol technology, and have
provided a setting to enable the protocol function (ON).
See the AMX Web site for more details.
URL http://www.amx.com/
Aspect Ratio The ratio between an image's length and its height.
Screens with a horizontal:vertical ratio of 16:9, such as HDTV
screens, are known as wide screens.
SDTV and general computer displays have an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Contrast The relative brightness of the light and dark areas of an image
can be increased or decreased to make text and graphics stand
out more clearly, or to make them appear softer. Adjusting this
particular property of an image is called contrast adjustment.
DHCP An abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, this
protocol automatically assigns an IP address to equipment
connected to a network.
DICOM An acronym for Digital Imaging and Communications in
Medicine.
An international standard that defines image standards and a
communications protocol for medical images.
Gateway Address This is a server (router) for communicating across a network
(subnet) divided according to subnet mask.
HDCP HDCP is an abbreviation for High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection.
It is used to prevent illegal copying and protect copyrights by
encrypting digital signals sent over DVI and HDMI ports.
Because the HDMI port on this projector supports HDCP, it
can project digital images protected by HDCP technology.
However, the projector may not be able to project images
protected with updated or revised versions of HDCP
encryption.
HDMI™An abbreviation for High Definition Multimedia Interface.
HDMI™is a standard aimed at digital consumer electronics and
computers. This is the standard by which HD images and
multichannel audio signals are digitally transmitted.
By not compressing the digital signal, the image can be
transferred at the highest quality possible. It also provides an
encryption function for the digital signal.
HDTV An abbreviation for High-Definition Television that refers to
high-definition systems which satisfy the following conditions:
• Vertical resolution of 720p or 1080i or greater (p =
Progressive, i = Interlace)
• Screen aspect ratio of 16:9
Infrastructure
mode
A method for wireless LAN connection in which devices
communicate through access points.
Interlace Transmits information needed to create one screen by sending
every other line, starting from the top of the image and working
down to the bottom.
Images are more likely to flicker because one frame is displayed
every other line.
IP Address A number to identify a computer connected to a network.
Progressive Projects information to create one screen at a time, displaying
the image for one frame.
Even though the number of scan lines is the same, the amount
of flicker in images decreases because the volume of
information has doubled compared with an interlace system.
Glossary 264
Refresh Rate The light-emitting element of a display maintains the same
luminosity and color for an extremely short time.
Because of this, the image must be scanned many times per
second to refresh the light-emitting element.
The number of refresh operations per second is called the
Refresh rate and is expressed in hertz (Hz).
SDTV An abbreviation for Standard Definition Television that refers
to standard television systems which do not satisfy the
conditions for HDTV High-Definition Television.
SNMP An abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol,
which is the protocol for monitoring and controlling devices
such as routers and computers connected to a TCP/IP network.
sRGB An international standard for color intervals that was
formulated so that colors that are reproduced by video
equipment can be handled easily by computer operating
systems (OS) and the Internet. If the connected source has an
sRGB mode, set both the projector and the connected signal
source to sRGB.
SSID SSID is identification data for connecting to another device on
a wireless LAN. Wireless communication is possible between
devices with the same SSID.
Subnet Mask This is a numerical value that defines the number of bits used
for the network address on a divided network (subnet) from the
IP address.
SVGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 800 (horizontal) ×
600 (vertical) dots.
SXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×
1,024 (vertical) dots.
Sync. The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.
If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the
resulting images are not of a good quality.
The process of matching the phases of these signals (the relative
position of the crests and the troughs in the signal) is called
Synchronization.
If the signals are not synchronized, flickering, blurriness, and
horizontal interference occur.
Tracking The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.
If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the
resulting images are not of a good quality.
The process of matching the frequency of these signals (the
number of crests in the signal) is called Tracking.
If Tracking is not carried out correctly, wide vertical stripes
appear in the signal.
Trap IP Address This is the IP address for the destination computer used for
error notification in SNMP.
VGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 640 (horizontal) ×
480 (vertical) dots.
XGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,024 (horizontal) ×
768 (vertical) dots.
WXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×
800 (vertical) dots.
WUXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,920 (horizontal) ×
1,200 (vertical) dots.
Notices 265
Check these sections for important notices about your projector.
gg Related Links
• "FCC Compliance Statement" p.265
• "Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with
requirements of EU directive" p.266
• "Restriction of Use" p.266
• "Operating System References" p.266
• "Trademarks" p.266
• "Copyright Notice" p.267
• "Copyright Attribution" p.267
FCC Compliance Statement
Supplier's DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
According to 47CFR, Part 2 and 15
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals; and/or
CPU Boards and Power Supplies used with Class B Personal Computers
We: Epson America, Inc.
Located at: 3131 Katella Avenue, Los Alamitos, CA
Tel: 562-981-3840
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein, complies
with 47CFR Part 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each
product marketed, is identical to the representative unit tested and found to
be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the
equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation
accepted, due to quantity production and testing on a statistical basis as
required by 47CFR 2.906. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Trade Name: EPSON
Type of Product: LCD Projector
Model: HA25B/HA26B/HA27B/HA28B/HA29B/HA30B/HA44B
FCC Compliance Statement For United States Users
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this
equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device
and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the
FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a
shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has
more than one interface connector, do not leave cables connected to unused
interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Statement for Canadian EMC Rules
Notices 266
Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in
accordance with requirements of EU directive
Manufacturer: SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
Address: 3-5, Owa 3-chome, Suwa-shi, Nagano-ken 392-8502 Japan
Telephone: 81-266-52-3131
http://www.epson.com/
Importer: EPSON EUROPE B.V.
Address: Atlas Arena, Asia Building, Hoogoorddreef 5,1101 BA Amsterdam
Zuidoost
The Netherlands
Telephone: 31-20-314-5000
http://www.epson.eu/
Restriction of Use
When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety
such as transportation devices related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive
etc.; disaster prevention devices; various safety devices etc; or
functional/precision devices etc, you should use this product only after giving
consideration to including fail-safes and redundancies into your design to
maintain safety and total system reliability. Because this product was not
intended for use in applications requiring extremely high reliability/safety
such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear
power control equipment, or medical equipment related to direct medical care
etc, please make your own judgment on this product’s suitability after a full
evaluation.
Operating System References
• Microsoft®Windows®7 operating system
• Microsoft®Windows®8.1 operating system
• Microsoft®Windows®10 operating system
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "Windows 7",
"Windows 8.1", and "Windows 10". Furthermore, the collective term
"Windows" is used to refer to them all.
• OS X 10.11.x
• macOS 10.12.x
• macOS 10.13.x
• macOS 10.14.x
• macOS 10.15.x
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "OS X 10.11.x",
"macOS 10.12.x", "macOS 10.13.x", "macOS 10.14.x", and "macOS 10.15.x".
Furthermore, the collective term "Mac" is used to refer to them all.
Trademarks
EPSON is a registered trademark, EXCEED YOUR VISION and its logos are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Wi-Fi®, WPA2®, WPA3®, and Miracast®are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Chrome, Chromebook, and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
"QR Code" is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
Notices 267
PJLink trademark is a trademark applied for registration or is already
registered in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and
areas.
Crestron®, Crestron Connected®, Crestron Fusion®, Crestron Control®, and
Crestron RoomView®are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Intel®is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
Extron®and XTP®are registered trademarks of RGB Systems. Incorporated.
HDBaseT™and the HDBaseT Alliance logo are trademarks of the HDBaseT
Alliance.
Android TV™is a trademark of Google LLC.
Other product names used herein are also for identification purposes only
and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and
all rights in those marks.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with
respect to the use of the information contained herein. Neither is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained
herein.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the
purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or
expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident,
misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or
alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply
with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable against any damages or problems
arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than
those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by
Seiko Epson Corporation.
The contents of this guide may be changed or updated without further notice.
Illustrations in this guide and the actual projector may differ.
Copyright Attribution
This information is subject to change without notice.
© 2021 Seiko Epson Corporation
2021.02 414103300EN